ABB ACS880-01 Series Hardware Manual

ABB industrial drives

Hardware manual

ACS880-01 drives

(0.55 to 250 kW, 0.75 to 350 hp)

List of related manuals

Drive hardware manuals and guides

ACS880-01 hardware manual

ACS880-01 quick installation guide for frames R1 to R3

ACS880-01 quick installation guide for frames R4 and R5

ACS880-01 quick installation guide for frames R6 to R9

ACS880-01 +P940/+P944 drives for cabinet installation supplement 3AUA0000145446

ACS880-01 assembly drawings for cable entry boxes of IP21 frames

R5 to R9

3AUA0000119627

ACS880-01 +H358 gland plate installation guide

ACS-AP-x assistant control panels user’s manual

3AD50000034735

3AUA0000085685

3AXD50000010497 Vibration dampers for ACS880-01 drives (frames R4 and R5, option

+C131) installation guide

Vibration dampers for ACS880-01 drives (frames R6 to R9, option

+C131) installation guide

3AXD50000013389

ACS880-01/04 +C132 marine type-approved drives supplement

ACS880-01 +N7502 drives for SYnRM motors (0.8 to 200 kW) supplement

Flange mounting kit installation supplement

Flange mounting kit quick installation guide for ACS880-01 frames R1 to R3

Flange mounting kit quick installation guide for ACS880-01 frames R4 to R5

Flange mounting kit quick installation guide for ACS880-01 and

ACS580-01 frames R6 to R9

Common mode filter kit for ACS880-01 drives (frame R6, option

+E208) installation guide

Common mode filter kit for ACS880-01 drives (frame R7, option

+E208) installation guide

Common mode filter kit for ACS880-01 drives (frame R8, option

+E208) installation guide

Common mode filter kit for ACS880-01 drives (frame R9, option

+E208) installation guide

ACS880-01 drives and ACS880-04 drive modules common DC systems application guide

Code (English)

3AUA0000078093

3AUA0000085966

3AUA0000099663

3AUA0000099689

3AXD50000010521

3AXD50000029482

3AXD50000019100

3AXD50000026158

3AXD50000026159

3AXD50000019099

3AXD50000015178

3AXD50000015179

3AXD50000015180

3AXD50000015201

3AUA0000127818

Drive firmware manuals and guides

ACS880 primary control program firmware manual 3AUA0000085967

Quick start-up guide for ACS880 drives with primary control program 3AUA0000098062

Option manuals and guides

Manuals and quick guides for I/O extension modules, fieldbus adapters, etc.

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. See section

Document library on the Internet

on the inside of the back cover. For manuals not available in the Document library, contact your local

ABB representative.

The code below opens an online listing of the manuals applicable to this product.

ACS880-01 manuals

 2017 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.

Hardware manual

ACS880-01 drives

(0.55 to 250 kW, 0.75 to 350 hp)

Table of contents

1. Safety instructions

4. Mechanical installation

6. Electrical installation

8. Start-up

3AUA0000078093 Rev M

EN

EFFECTIVE: 2017-08-08

5

Table of contents

List of related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1. Safety instructions

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Use of warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Safety in installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Permanent magnet motor drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Printed circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Safe start-up and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Permanent magnet motor drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2. Introduction to the manual

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Contents of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Categorization by frame size and option code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Quick installation, start-up and operating flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3. Operation principle and hardware description

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Main circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Layout (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Layout (IP55, option +B056) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Layout (UL Type 12, option +B056) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Layout (IP20 – UL Open Type, options +P940 and +P944) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Overview of power and control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

External control connection terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Control panel mounting platform cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Control panel door mounting kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Type designation label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Type designation key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

4. Mechanical installation

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

6

Examining the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Necessary tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Moving the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Unpacking and examining the delivery (frames R1 to R5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Frame R5 cable entry box (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Unpacking and examining the delivery (frames R6 to R9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Frame R6 cable entry box (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Frame R7 cable entry box (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Frame R8 cable entry box (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Frame R9 cable entry box (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Installing the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Installing vibration dampers (option +C131) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Frames R1 to R4 (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Frames R5 to R9 (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Frames R1 to R9 (IP55, UL Type 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Flange mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Cabinet installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Grounding inside the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Installing drives above one another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

5. Planning the electrical installation

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Limitation of liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Selecting the supply disconnecting device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

European Union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Other regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Selecting and dimensioning the main contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Protecting the motor insulation and bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Requirements table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Additional requirements for ABB motors of types other than M2_, M3_, M4_,

HX_ and AM_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Additional requirements for ABB high-output and IP23 motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Additional requirements for non-ABB high-output and IP23 motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Additional data for calculating the rise time and the peak line-to-line voltage . . . . . . 67

Additional note for sine filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Selecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Typical power cable sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Alternative power cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Recommended power cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Power cable types for limited use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Not allowed power cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Motor cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Additional US requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Armored cable / shielded power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Selecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Shielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

7

Signals in separate cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Signals allowed to be run in the same cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Relay cable type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Control panel cable length and type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Routing the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Separate control cable ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Continuous motor cable shield or enclosure for equipment on the motor cable . . . . . . . . 78

Implementing thermal overload and short-circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Protecting the drive and input power cable in short-circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Protecting the drive and the input power and motor cables against thermal overload . . . 82

Protecting the motor against thermal overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Protecting the drive against ground faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Residual current device compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Connecting drives to a common DC system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Implementing the Emergency stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Implementing the Safe torque off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Implementing the safety functions with the FSO module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Implementing the ATEX-certified Safe motor disconnection function (option +Q971) . . . . . . 84

Implementing the Power-loss ride-through function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Using power factor compensation capacitors with the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Using a contactor between the drive and the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Implementing a bypass connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Example bypass connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Switching the motor power supply from drive to direct-on-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Switching the motor power supply from direct-on-line to drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Protecting the contacts of relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Implementing a motor temperature sensor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Drive I/O, I/O extension and encoder interface modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

6. Electrical installation

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Checking the insulation of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Input power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Motor and motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Brake resistor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Checking the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner-grounded TN systems . . . . . . . 93

EMC filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Ground-to-phase varistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

690 V drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Connecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Connection procedure for frames R1 to R3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Connection procedure for frames R4 and R5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Connection procedure for frames R6 to R9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Grounding the motor cable shield at the motor end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

8

DC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Connecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Default I/O connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Notes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Jumpers and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

External power supply for the control unit (XPOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, PTC and KTY84 sensor inputs (XAI, XAO) . . . . . . 113

Drive-to-drive link (XD2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

DIIL input (XD24:1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

DI6 (XDI:6) as PTC sensor input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Safe torque off (XSTO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Safety functions module connection (X12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Control cable connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Connecting a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Controlling several drives through panel bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Installing optional modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Mechanical installation of I/O extension, fieldbus adapter and pulse encoder interface modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Wiring I/O extension, fieldbus adapter and pulse encoder interface modules . . . . . . . . 122

Installation of safety functions modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Installation procedure into Slot 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Installation next to the control unit on frames R7 to R9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

7. Installation checklist

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

8. Start-up

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Startup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

9. Fault tracing

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Warning and fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

10. Maintenance

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Descriptions of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Recommended annual maintenance actions by the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Recommended maintenance intervals after start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Replacing the main cooling fan of frames R1 to R3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Replacing the auxiliary cooling fan of IP55 frames R1 to R3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Replacing the main cooling fan of frames R4 and R5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Replacing the auxiliary cooling fan of frames R4 and R5 (IP55 and option +C135)

9

and IP21 frame R5 types ACS880-01-xxxx-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Replacing the main cooling fan of frames R6 to R8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Replacing the auxiliary cooling fan of frames R6 to R9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Replacing the IP55 auxiliary cooling fan of frames R8 and R9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Replacing the main cooling fans of frame R9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Replacing the drive (IP21, UL Type 1, frames R1 to R9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Reforming the capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Memory unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Replacing the memory unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Replacing the control panel battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Replacing the control unit battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Replacing safety functions modules (FSO-12, option +Q973 and FSO-21, option +Q972) . 148

11. Technical data

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Marine type-approved drives (option +C132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Drives for SynRM motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Ambient temperature derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

IP21 (UL Type 1) drive types and other IP55 (UL Type 12) types than listed in the following subheadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

IP55 (UL Type 12) drive types -274A-2, 293A-3, -260A-5, -302A-5 and -174A-7 . . 158

IP55 (UL Type 12) drive type -240A-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

IP55 (UL Type 12) drive types -363A-3 and -361A-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

IP55 (UL Type 12) drive type -210A-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

IP55 (UL Type 12) types -0430A-3, -0414A-5 and -0271A-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Altitude derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Deratings for special settings in the drive control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Ex motor, sine filter, low noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

High speed mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Fuses (IEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 aR fuses (frames R1 to R9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

gG fuses (frames R1 to R9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Quick guide for selecting between gG and aR fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Calculating the short-circuit current of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Fuses (UL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Dimensions, weights and free space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Free space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Losses, cooling data and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Cooling air flow and heat dissipation for flange mounting (option +C135) . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

IEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

UL listed cable lugs and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Terminal data for the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Electrical power network specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Motor connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

10

Control unit (ZCU-12) connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Protection classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Compliance with the European EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Compliance with the European RoHS Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Compliance with the European Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Compliance with the EN 61800-3:2004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Category C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Category C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Category C4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

UL marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

UL checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

CSA marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

China RoHS marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

RCM marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

WEEE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

EAC marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Cybersecurity disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

12. Dimension drawings

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Frame R1 (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Frame R1 (IP55, UL Type 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Frame R2 (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Frame R2 (IP55, UL Type 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Frame R3 (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Frame R3 (IP55, UL Type 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Frame R4 (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Frame R4 (IP55, UL Type 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Frame R5 (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Frame R5 (IP55, UL Type 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Frame R6 (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Frame R6 (IP55, UL Type 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Frame R7 (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Frame R7 (IP55, UL Type 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Frame R8 (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Frame R8 (IP55, UL Type 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Frame R9 (IP21, UL Type 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Frame R9 (IP55, UL Type 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

11

13. Safe Torque off function

Contents of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Compliance with the European Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Activation switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Cable types and lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Grounding of protective shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Single drive (internal power supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Dual-channel connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Single-channel connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Multiple drives (internal power supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Multiple drives (external power supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Operation principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Start-up including acceptance test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Competence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Acceptance test reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Acceptance test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Competence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Fault tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Safety data (SIL, PL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

14. Resistor braking

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Operation principle and hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Planning the braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Selecting the brake circuit components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Selecting a custom resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Selecting and routing the brake resistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Minimizing electromagnetic interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Maximum cable length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

EMC compliance of the complete installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Placing the brake resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Protecting the system against thermal overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Frames R1 to R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Frames R5 to R9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Protecting the resistor cable against short-circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Checking the insulation of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Degree of protection and thermal constant of the resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

12

Terminals and cable lead-through data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Dimensions and weights of external resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

JBR-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

SACE08RE44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

SACE15RE13 and SACE15RE22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

SAFUR80F500 and SAFUR90F575 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

SAFUR125F500 and SAFUR200F500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

15. Common mode, du/dt and sine filters

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Common mode filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

When is a common mode filter needed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 du/dt filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

When is a du/dt filter needed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

du/dt filter types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Description, installation and technical data of the FOCH filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Description, installation and technical data of the NOCH filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Sine filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Selecting a sine filter for a drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Description, installation and technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Further information

Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Document library on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Safety instructions 13

1

Safety instructions

What this chapter contains

This chapter contains the safety instructions which you must obey when installing, operating and servicing the drive. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or damage may occur to the drive, motor or driven equipment. Read the safety instructions before you work on the unit.

Use of warnings

Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and/or damage to the equipment and advise on how to avoid the danger. The following warning symbols are used in this manual:

Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.

General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by electricity, which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.

Electrostatic sensitive devices warning warns of electrostatic discharge which can damage the equipment.

14 Safety instructions

Safety in installation and maintenance



Electrical safety

These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive, motor cable or motor.

WARNING!

Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment:

• Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive.

• Never work on the drive, motor cable or motor when main power is applied.

After disconnecting the input power, always wait for 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive, motor or motor cable.

Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least 1 Mohm) that:

• voltage between drive input phases L1, L2 and L3 and the frame is close to 0 V

• voltage between terminals UDC+ and UDC- and the frame is close to 0 V.

• Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the external control circuits. Externally supplied control circuits may cause dangerous voltages inside the drive even when the main power on the drive is switched off.

• Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive.

• Do not connect the drive to a voltage higher than what is marked on the type designation label. Higher voltage can activate the brake chopper and lead to brake resistor overload, or activate the overvoltage controller what can lead to motor rushing to maximum speed.

Note:

• The motor cable terminals on the drive are at a dangerously high voltage when the input power is on, regardless of whether the motor is running or not.

• The DC terminals (UDC+, UDC-) carry a dangerous DC voltage (over 500 V) when internally connected to the intermediate DC circuit.

• Depending on the external wiring, dangerous voltages (115 V, 220 V or 230 V) may be present on the terminals of relay outputs (XRO1, XRO2 and XRO3).

• The Safe torque off function does not remove the voltage from the main and auxiliary circuits. The function is ineffective against deliberate sabotage or misuse.

Safety instructions 15

Grounding

These instructions are intended for all who are responsible for the grounding of the drive.

WARNING!

Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury, death, increased electromagnetic interference and equipment malfunction:

• Ground the drive, motor and adjoining equipment to ensure personnel safety in all circumstances, and to reduce electromagnetic emission and interference.

• Make sure that grounding conductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations.

• In a multiple-drive installation, connect each drive separately to protective earth (PE).

• Where EMC emissions must be minimized, make a 360° high frequency grounding of cable entries in order to suppress electromagnetic disturbances.

In addition, connect the cable shields to protective earth (PE) in order to meet safety regulations.

• Do not install a drive with EMC filter options +E200 or +E202 on an ungrounded power system or a high-resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms)

power system. See page 93

.

• Do not install 690 V drives on corner-grounded TN systems or cornergrounded IT systems.

Note:

• Power cable shields are suitable for equipment grounding conductors only when adequately sized to meet safety regulations.

• Standard EN 61800-5-1 (section 4.3.5.5.2.) requires that as the normal touch current of the drive is higher than 3.5 mA AC or 10 mA DC, you must use a fixed protective earth connection and

• a cross-section of the protective earthing conductor of at least 10 mm

2

Cu or 16 mm

2

Al, or

• automatic disconnection of the supply in case of discontinuity of the protective earthing conductor, or

• a second protective earthing conductor of the same cross-sectional area as the original protective earthing conductor.

16 Safety instructions

Permanent magnet motor drives

These are additional warnings concerning permanent magnet motor drives.

WARNING!

Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment:

• Do not work on the drive when the permanent magnet motor is rotating. Also, when the supply power is switched off and the inverter is stopped, a rotating permanent magnet motor feeds power to the intermediate circuit of the drive and the supply connections become live.

Before installation and maintenance work on the drive:

• Stop the motor.

• Ensure that there is no voltage on the drive power terminals according to step

1 or 2, or if possible, according to the both steps.

1. Disconnect the motor from the drive with a safety switch or by other means. Check by measuring that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output terminals (L1, L2, L3, T1/U, T2/V, T3/W, UDC+, UDC-).

2. Ensure that the motor cannot rotate during work. Make sure that no other system, like hydraulic crawling drives, is able to rotate the motor directly or through any mechanical connection like felt, nip, rope, etc. Check by measuring that there is no voltage present on the drive input or output terminals (L1, L2, L3, T1/U, T2/V, T3/W, UDC+, UDC-). Ground the drive output terminals temporarily by connecting them together as well as to the

PE.

Safety instructions 17

General safety

These instructions are intended for all who install and service the drive.

WARNING!

Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment:

• Use safety shoes with a metal toe cap to avoid foot injury. Wear protective gloves and long sleeves. Some parts have sharp edges.

• Handle the unit carefully.

• For frame sizes R6 to R9: Lift the drive using the lifting eyes of the unit. Do not tilt the drive.

The drive is heavy and its center of gravity is high.

An overturning unit can cause physical injury.

• Beware of hot surfaces. Some parts, such as heatsinks of power semiconductors, remain hot for a while after disconnection of the electrical supply.

• Ensure that debris from borings and grindings does not enter the drive when installing. Electrically conductive debris inside the unit may cause damage or malfunction.

• Ensure sufficient cooling.

• Do not attach the drive by riveting or welding.

18 Safety instructions



Printed circuit boards

WARNING!

Ignoring the following instructions can cause damage to the printed circuit boards:

• Wear a grounding wrist band when handling the boards. Do not touch the boards unnecessarily. The printed circuit boards contain components sensitive to electrostatic discharge.

Safe start-up and operation



General safety

These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation of the drive or operate the drive.

WARNING!

Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment:

• Before you connect voltage to the drive, make sure that the drive covers are on. Keep the covers on during the operation.

• Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service, make sure that the motor and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range provided by the drive. The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the power line.

• Before you activate the automatic fault reset or automatic restart functions of the drive control program, make sure that no dangerous situations can occur.

These functions reset the drive automatically and continue operation after a fault or supply break. If these functions are activated, the installation must be clearly marked as defined in IEC/EN 61800-5-1, subclause 6.5.3, for example,

“THIS MACHINE STARTS AUTOMATICALLY”.

• The maximum number of drive power-ups is five in ten minutes. Too frequent power-ups can damage the charging circuit of the DC capacitors.

• Make sure that any safety circuits (for example, emergency stop and Safe torque off) are validated in start-up. See chapter

Start-up for reference of the

validation instructions.

Note:

• If you select an external source for start command and it is ON, the drive will start immediately after an input voltage break or fault reset unless the drive is configured for 3-wire (a pulse) start/stop.

Safety instructions 19

• When the control location is not set to local, the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive.

Permanent magnet motor drives

WARNING!

Do not run the motor over the rated speed. Motor overspeed leads to overvoltage which may damage or explode the capacitors in the intermediate circuit of the drive.

20 Safety instructions

Introduction to the manual 21

2

Introduction to the manual

What this chapter contains

This chapter describes the manual. It contains a flowchart of steps for checking the delivery, installing and starting up the drive. The flowchart refers to chapters/sections in this manual and to other manuals.

Target audience

This manual is intended for people who plan the installation, install, start-up, use and service the drive. Read the manual before working on the drive. You are expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical components and electrical schematic symbols.

The manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown.

Contents of the manual

This manual contains the instructions and information for the basic drive configuration. The chapters of the manual are briefly described below.

Safety instructions gives safety instructions for the installation, start up, operation and

maintenance of the drive.

Introduction to the manual

introduces the manual.

Operation principle and hardware description describes the drive.

Mechanical installation describes how to install the basic drive mechanically.

Planning the electrical installation contains instructions for the motor and cable

selection, protections and cable routing.

22 Introduction to the manual

Electrical installation gives instructions on wiring the drive.

Installation checklist

contains a list for checking the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive.

Start-up

describes the start-up procedure of the drive.

Fault tracing describes the fault tracing of the drive.

Maintenance contains preventive maintenance instructions.

Technical data contains the technical specifications of the drive, eg, the ratings, sizes

and technical requirements, provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other markings.

Dimension drawings contains dimension drawings of the drives and auxiliary

components.

Safe Torque off function

describes the Safe torque off function of the drive and gives instructions on its implementing.

Resistor braking describes selection, protection and wiring of brake choppers and

resistors. The chapter also contains technical data.

Common mode, du/dt and sine filters describes selection external filters for the drive.

Related manuals

See List of related manuals

on the inside of the front cover.

Categorization by frame size and option code

The instructions, technical data and dimension drawings which concern only certain drive frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size (R1, R2, etc.). The frame size is marked on the type designation label.

The instructions and technical data which concern only certain optional selections are marked with option codes (such as +E200). The options included in the drive can be identified from the option codes visible on the type designation label. The option selections are listed in section

Type designation key on page 35

.

Introduction to the manual 23

Quick installation, start-up and operating flowchart

Task

Plan the electrical installation and acquire the accessories needed (cables, fuses, etc.).

Check the ratings, required cooling air flow, input power connection, compatibility of the motor, motor connection, and other technical data.

See

Planning the electrical installation

(page 59

)

Technical data (page 149

)

Check the installation site.

Ambient conditions

(page

202 )

Unpack and examine the units (only intact units may be started up).

Examine that all necessary optional modules and equipment are present and correct.

Mount the drive.

Mechanical installation

(page

42

or

45 )

If the drive has been non-operational for more than one year, the converter

DC link capacitors need to be

reformed (page 146

)

Route the cables.

Check the insulation of the supply cable, the motor and the motor cable.

Connect the power cables.

Connect the control cables.

Routing the cables

(page

110

)

(page

77 )

Checking the insulation of the assembly

(page

91

)

Connecting the power cables

(page

94

),

Connecting the control cables

Check the installation.

Start the drive up.

Installation checklist

Start-up (page 129 )

(page 127 )

Operate the drive: start, stop, speed control etc.

ACS880 quick start-up guide, firmware manual

24 Introduction to the manual

FLON-01

FPBA-01

FEN-01

FEN-11

FEN-21

FEN-31

FDCO-01

FPTC-01

FPTC-02

FSE-31

FSO-12

FSO-21

Frame (size)

IGBT

Terms and abbreviations

Explanation Term/

Abbreviation

EMC

EMI

EMT

FAIO-01

FDIO-01

FIO-01

FIO-11

FCAN-01

FCNA-01

FDNA-01

FECA-01

FEPL-01

FENA-01

FENA-11

I/O

ZCON

ZCU

ZGAB

Electromagnetic compatibility

Electromagnetic interference

Electrical metallic tubing

Optional analog I/O extension module

Optional digital /O extension module

Optional digital I/O extension module

Optional analog I/O extension module

Optional FCAN-01 CANopen adapter module

Optional ControlNet™ adapter module

Optional DeviceNet™ adapter module

Optional EtherCAT adapter module

Optional Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module

Optional Ethernet/IP™ and Modbus/TCP and PROFINET adapter module

Optional dual port Ethernet/IP™ and Modbus/TCP and PROFINET adapter module

Optional LonWorks® adapter module

Optional PROFIBUS DP adapter module

Optional TTL incremental encoder interface module

Optional TTL absolute encoder interface module

Optional resolver interface module

Optional HTL incremental encoder interface module

Optional optical DDCS communication adapter module

Optional thermistor protection module for ACS880 drives

Optional ATEX-certified thermistor protection module for ACS880 drives

Optional pulse encoder interface module

Optional functional safety module

Optional functional safety module

Physical size of the drive

Insulated gate bipolar transistor; a voltage-controlled semiconductor type widely used in inverters due to their easy controllability and high switching frequency.

Input/Output

Control board in which the control program runs.

Control board built in a housing. The external I/O control signals are connected to the control unit, or optional I/O extensions mounted on it.

Brake chopper adapter board in frames R8 to R9

Introduction to the manual 25

Term/

Abbreviation

ZGAD

ZINT

ZMU

R1…R9

Explanation

Gate driver adapter board in frames R6 to R9

Main circuit board

The memory unit attached to the control unit of the drive

Frame size designation of the drive

26 Introduction to the manual

Operation principle and hardware description 27

Operation principle and hardware description

3

What this chapter contains

This chapter briefly describes the operation principle and construction of the drive.

Product overview

The ACS880-01 is a drive for controlling asynchronous AC induction motors, permanent magnet synchronous motors, AC induction servomotors and ABB synchronous reluctance motors (SynRM motors). The main cooling air fan of the drive is speed controlled and the auxiliary cooling fan on/off controlled.

28 Operation principle and hardware description



Main circuit

The main circuit of the drive is shown below.

L1

L2

L3

ACS880-01

1 2 3

4

T1/U

T2/V

T3/W

R- UDC+ UDC-

R+

1 Rectifier. Converts alternating current and voltage to direct current and voltage.

2 DC link. DC circuit between rectifier and inverter.

3 Inverter. Converts direct current and voltage to alternating current and voltage.

4 Brake chopper. Conducts the surplus energy from the intermediate DC circuit of the drive to the brake resistor when necessary. The chopper operates when the DC link voltage exceeds a certain maximum limit. The voltage rise is typically caused by deceleration (braking) of a high inertia motor. User obtains and installs the brake resistor when needed.

Operation principle and hardware description 29



Layout (IP21, UL Type 1)

The components of the standard IP21 drive are shown below (view of frame R5).

4

4

6

1

5

3 Cable entry box

4 Four fastening points at the back of the unit

5 Heatsink

2

6

3

30 Operation principle and hardware description



Layout (IP55, option +B056)

The components of the IP55 drive (option +B056) are shown below (view of frame

R4).

3

3

5

1

1 Control panel behind the control panel cover

3 Four fastening points at the back of the unit

4 Heatsink

4

2

5

Operation principle and hardware description 31



Layout (UL Type 12, option +B056)

The components of the UL Type 12 drive (option +B056) are shown below (view of frame R6).

5

3

3

6

4

2

1

1 Control panel behind the control panel cover

3 Four fastening points at the back of the drive

4 Heatsink

6 Hood (included in frames R4 to R9)

5



Layout (IP20 – UL Open Type, options +P940 and +P944)

See ACS880-01 +P940/+P944 drives for cabinet installation supplement

(3AUA0000145446 [English]).

32 Operation principle and hardware description



Overview of power and control connections

The diagram shows the power connections and control interfaces of the drive.

FXX Slot 1

1

X208

X13

7

PE

L1

L2

L3

FXX

4

..... .....

Slot 2 2

FXXX

X12

...... ......

PE

L1

Slot 3

3

L2

L3

R-

5 6

...

...

U/T1

V/T2

UDC+

R+

W/T3

UDC-

8

M

3 ~

1

2

3

Analog and digital I/O extension modules, feedback interface modules and fieldbus communication modules can be inserted into slots 1, 2 and 3. See section

designation key , page 35 .

4 Memory unit, see page 147.

5 Connector for safety functions modules, see page

123 .

Type

6 See page 33 ,

Default I/O connection diagram (page 111

) and

Control unit (ZCU-12) connection data

(page

198 ).

7 See section

Control panel , page 34 .

8 du/dt, common mode or sine filter (optional), see page

263

.

Operation principle and hardware description 33

External control connection terminals

The layout of external control connection terminals of the drive is shown below.

X202

X205

X203

X12

X208

X13

XPOW

X204

XAI

XRO1

J1, J2

XAO XD2D XRO2

XSTO XDI

J3, J6

XDIO XD24 XRO3

Description

XPOW External power input

XAI Analog inputs

XAO Analog outputs

XD2D Drive-to-drive link

XRO1 Relay output 1

XRO2 Relay output 2

XRO3 Relay output 3

XD24 Start interlock connection

(DIIL) and +24 V output

XDIO Digital input/outputs

XDI Digital inputs

XSTO Safe torque off connection

X12

X13

Connector for safety functions modules (optional)

Control panel connection

X202 Option slot 1

X203 Option slot 2

X204 Option slot 3

X205 Memory unit connection

X208 Auxiliary cooling fan connection

J1, J2 Voltage/Current selection jumpers (J1, J2) for analog inputs

J3, J6 Drive-to-drive link termination jumper (J3), common digital input ground selection jumper (J6)

34 Operation principle and hardware description



Control panel

The control panel can be removed by pulling it forward from the top edge and reinstalled in reverse order. For the use of the control panel, see the firmware manual or ACS-AP assistant control panels user’s manual (3AUA0000085685 [English]).

Control panel mounting platform cover

In deliveries without control panel (option + 0J400) the control panel mounting platform is covered. The indication LEDs on the platform are visible through the protective cover. Note : The cover is not included with options +0J400+P940 and

+0J400+P944.

Control panel door mounting kits

Door mounting kits for the control panel are available. For more information see

DPMP-01 mounting platform installation guide (3AUA0000100140 [English]) or

DPMP-02/03 mounting platform installation guide (3AUA0000136205 [English].

Type designation label

The type designation label includes an IEC and NEMA rating, appropriate markings, a type designation and a serial number, which allow identification of each unit. The type designation label is located on the front cover. An example label is shown below.

Operation principle and hardware description 35

1

6

8

2

4

5

3

7

9

No. Description

1

Type designation, see section Type designation key on page 35 .

2 Manufacturing address

3 Frame size

4 Cooling method

5 Degree of protection

6 Ratings in the supply voltage range, see section

Ratings on page 150 .

7

Short-circuit withstand strength, see section Electrical power network specification on

page

197

.

8 Valid markings

9 Serial number. The first digit of the serial number refers to the manufacturing plant. The next four digits refer to the unit’s manufacturing year and week, respectively. The remaining digits complete the serial number so that there are no two units with the same number.

Type designation key

The type designation contains information on the specifications and configuration of the drive. The first digits from left express the basic configuration, eg, ACS880-01-

12A6-3 The optional selections are given thereafter, separated by plus signs, eg,

+L519. The main selections are described below. Not all selections are available for all types. For more information, refer to ACS880-01 Ordering Information

(3AXD10000014923), available on request.

CODE DESCRIPTION

Basic codes

01 When no options are selected: Wall mounted drive, IP21 (UL Type 1), ACS-AP-I assistant control panel, no EMC filter, DC choke, ACS880 primary control program,

Safe torque off function, cable entry box, brake chopper in frames R1 to R4, coated boards, printed multilingual quick guides and CD containing all manuals.

36 Operation principle and hardware description

CODE

Size xxxx

DESCRIPTION

Refer to the rating tables, page

150

Voltage range

2 208…240 V

3

5

380…415 V

380…500 V

7 525…690 V

Option codes (plus codes)

Degree of protection

B056 IP55 (UL Type 12)

Construction

C205 Marine product certification for DNV-GL. Requires option +C132.

C206

C207

C208

C209

Marine product certification for ABS. Requires option +C132.

Marine product certification for Lloyd's register. Requires option +C132.

Marine product certification for RINA. Requires option +C132.

Marine product certification for BV. Requires option +C132.

C210

C131

C132

Marine product certification for NK. Requires option +C132.

Vibration dampers for frames R4 to R9

Marine type-approved drive. Requires option +C131 in wall installations for frames

R4 to R9. Includes common mode filter for frames R6 to R9.

Drive for flange mounting. Removes the cable entry box.

C135

C228 Marine product certification for CCS. Requires option +C132.

Resistor braking

D150

Filters

Brake chopper for frame R5 and up

E200

E201

EMC filter for second environment TN (grounded) system, category C3.

EMC filter for second environment IT (ungrounded) system, category C3. Available for 380…500 V frames R6 to R9.

E202

E208

EMC filter for first environment TN (grounded) system, category C2.

Common mode filter

Cable entry box

H358 UK cable entry box

Control panel

0J400 No control panel. Includes control panel holder cover. loose control panel to be able to commission the drive.

Note : You need at least one

Fieldbus adapters

K451 FDNA-01 DeviceNet™ adapter module

K452 FLON-01 LonWorks® adapter module

Operation principle and hardware description 37

L500

L501

L502

L503

L508

L515

L516

L517

CODE

K454

K457

K458

K462

K469

K470

DESCRIPTION

FPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP adapter module

FCAN-01 CANopen adapter module

FSCA-01 RS-485 adapter module

FCNA-01 ControlNet™ adapter module

FECA-01 EtherCAT adapter module

FEPL-01 Ethernet POWERLINK adapter module

K473 FENA-11 high performance Ethernet/IP™, Modbus/TCP and PROFINET adapter module

I/O extensions and feedback interfaces

FIO-11 analog I/O extension module

FIO-01 digital I/O extension module

FEN-31 HTL incremental encoder interface module

FDCO-01 optical DDCS communication adapter module

FDCO-02 optical DDCS communication adapter module

FEA-03 I/O extension adapter

FEN-21 resolver interface module

FEN-01 TTL incremental encoder interface module

L518

L521

L525

L526

L536

L537

FEN-11 absolute encoder interface module

FSE-31 pulse encoder interface module

FAIO-01 analog I/O extension module

FDIO-01 digital I/O extension module

FPTC-01 Thermistor protection module for ACS880 drives

FPTC-02 ATEX-certified thermistor protection module, EX II (2) GD for ACS880 drives

Specialties

P904 Extended warranty

P940

P944

Drive without front covers and cable entry box. Includes control panel. Note : With option +0J400 does not include control panel holder cover.

Drive without cable entry box. Includes control panel. Note : With option +0J400 does not include control panel holder cover.

ATEX-certified function

Q971 ATEX-certified Safe motor disconnection function using the Safe torque off function

Safety functions modules

Q972 FSO-21 safety functions module

Q973 FSO-12 safety functions module

Full set of printed manuals in selected language. Note: The delivered manual set may include manuals in English if the translation is not available.

R700

R701

English

German

38 Operation principle and hardware description

CODE

R702

R703

R704

R705

R706

R707

R708

R709

R711

R713

R714

DESCRIPTION

Italian

Dutch

Danish

Swedish

Finnish

French

Spanish

Portuguese

Russian

Polish

Turkish

Mechanical installation 39

Mechanical installation

4

What this chapter contains

This chapter gives a description of the mechanical installation of the drive.

Safety

WARNING!

For frame sizes R6 to R9: Use the lifting eyes of the drive when you lift the drive. Do not tilt the drive.

The drive is heavy and its center of gravity is high.

An overturning drive can cause physical injury.

40 Mechanical installation

Examining the installation site

The drive must be installed in an upright position with the cooling section against a wall. All IP21 (UL Type 1) and IP55 drives and UL Type 12 drives of frames R1 to R3 can be installed tightly side by side. For UL Type 12 drives of frames R4 to R9, leave

100 mm (4 in) between the hoods.

Make sure that the installation site agrees with these requirements:

• The installation site has sufficient ventilation to prevent overheating of the drive.

See section Losses, cooling data and noise on page 189 .

• The operation conditions of the drive agree with the specifications in section

Ambient conditions (page 202

).

• The wall is vertical, not flammable and strong enough to hold the weight of the drive. See page

187

.

• The material below the installation is not flammable.

• There is enough free space above and below the drive for cooling air flow, service

and maintenance. See page 187 . There is enough free space in front of the drive

for operation, service and maintenance.

200 mm (7.87 in.)

300 mm (11.81 in.)

Necessary tools

• Drill and drill bits

• Screwdriver and/or wrench with bits. The drive cover has Torx screws.

Mechanical installation 41

Moving the drive

Move the transport package by pallet truck to the installation site.

42 Mechanical installation

Unpacking and examining the delivery (frames R1 to R5)

This illustration shows the layout of the transport package. Examine that all items are present and there are no signs of damage. Read the data on the type designation label of the drive to make sure that the drive is of the correct type.

IP21 (UL Type 1)

11

13

Item Description

1 Drive with factory installed options.

Control cable grounding shelf.

Romex connectors in IP21 frames

R1 to R3 in a plastic bag inside the cable entry box.

2 Manuals CD

Item Description

6…9 Cushions

13

3 10

Vibration damper package (option

+C131)

Frame R4 and IP55 (UL Type 12) frame R5: below the cable entry box

IP21 (Ul Type 1) frame R5: inside the cable entry box

PET straps

4

5

Printed quick guides and manuals, multilingual residual voltage warning sticker

Cardboard tray

Cardboard sleeve

11

-

Top cardboard cover

-

Mechanical installation 43

IP55 (UL Type 12)

,'VWLFNHUHQG

3

9

8

4

2

7

10

6

12

5

1

13

14

11

15

Item Description

1

2

Printed quick guides and manuals, multilingual residual voltage warning sticker

Manuals CD

3 Cardboard tray

3

3AXD50000003341

Item Description

7…11 Cushions and cardboard support

4

5

6

Cardboard sleeve

Cushion

Drive with factory installed options.

Control cable grounding shelf.

12 PET straps

13 Hood included in frames R4 and R5.

The hood is required only in UL Type

12 installations.

14 Support

15 Vibration damper package (option

+C131)

-

To unpack:

• Cut the straps (10).

• Remove the top cardboard cover (11) and cushions (6…9).

• Lift the cardboard sleeve (5).

• Lift the drive.

44 Mechanical installation



Frame R5 cable entry box (IP21, UL Type 1)

This illustration shows the contents of the cable entry box package. The package also includes an assembly drawing which shows how to install the cable entry box to the drive module frame.

3aua0000118007

Mechanical installation 45

Unpacking and examining the delivery (frames R6 to R9)

If you have option +H358, see the ACS880-01 +H358 UK gland plate frames R6 to

R9 installation guide (3AXD50000034735).

This illustration shows the layout of the transport package. Examine that all items are present and there are no signs of damage. Read the data on the type designation label of the drive to make sure that the drive is of the correct type.

IP21 (UL Type 1)

3

8

7

6

1

2

5

9

Item Description

1 Drive with factory installed options

2

3

Cable entry box. Power and control cable grounding shelves in a plastic bag, assembly drawing. Note : The cable entry box is mounted to the

IP55 drive module frame at the factory.

Cardboard cover

4

Item Description

6 Cushion

7 Straps

8

4

5

Stopper

Pallet tray

9

-

3axd50000012445

Printed quick guides and manuals CD and multilingual residual voltage warning sticker

Vibration damper package (option

+C131). For frame R6: inside the cable entry box.

-

46 Mechanical installation

IP55 (UL Type 12)

2

7

6

5

1

8

4

Item Description

1

2

3

Drive with factory installed options

Cardboard cover

Stopper

4 Pallet tray

3

3axd50000012445

Item Description

5

6

7

8

Cushion

Straps

Hood (required only in UL Type 12 installation)

Printed quick guides and manuals CD and multilingual residual voltage warning sticker

To unpack:

• Cut the straps (6).

• Remove the top cardboard cover (3) and cushion (4).

• Lift the cardboard sleeve (5).

• Attach lifting hooks to the lifting eyes of the drive. Lift the drive with a hoist.

For frames R6 to R9 with option +H358, see also the ACS880-01 +H358 UK gland plate frames R6 to R9 installation guide (3AXD50000034735).

Mechanical installation 47



Frame R6 cable entry box (IP21, UL Type 1)

This illustration shows the contents of the cable entry box package. The package also includes an assembly drawing which shows how to install the cable entry box to the drive module frame.

3aua0000112044

48 Mechanical installation



Frame R7 cable entry box (IP21, UL Type 1)

This illustration shows the contents of the cable entry box package. The package also includes an assembly drawing which shows how to install the cable entry box to the drive module frame.

3aua0000111117

Mechanical installation 49



Frame R8 cable entry box (IP21, UL Type 1)

This illustration shows the contents of the cable entry box package. There is also an assembly drawing which shows how to install the cable entry box to the drive module frame.

3aua0000112174

50 Mechanical installation



Frame R9 cable entry box (IP21, UL Type 1)

This illustration shows the contents of the cable entry box package. The package also includes an assembly drawing which shows how to install the cable entry box to the drive module frame.

3aua0000112356

Mechanical installation 51

Installing the drive

This section tells you how to install the drive on wall without vibration dampers.



Installing vibration dampers (option +C131)

Marine type approval (option +C132) requires the installation of vibration dampers for frames R4 to R9 in wall installations. See Vibration dampers for ACS880-01 drives

(frames R4 and R5, option +C131) installation guide (3AXD50000010497 [English]) or Vibration dampers for ACS880-01 drives (frames R6 to R9, option +C131) installation guide (3AXD50000010497 [English]). The guide is included in the vibration damper package and on the manuals CD.



Frames R1 to R4 (IP21, UL Type 1)

1. See the dimensions in chapter

Dimension drawings

. Mark the locations for the four mounting holes.

2. Drill the mounting holes.

3. Insert anchors or plugs into the holes and start the screws or bolts into the anchors or plugs. Drive the screws or bolts long enough into the wall to make them carry the weight of the drive.

4. Position the drive onto the bolts on the wall.

5. Tighten the bolts in the wall securely.

52 Mechanical installation

1 2

× 4

× 4

3

M5

× 4

5

× 4

4

Mechanical installation 53



Frames R5 to R9 (IP21, UL Type 1)

Note : For frames R6 to R9 with option +H358, see ACS880-01 +H358 UK gland plate frames R6 to R9 installation guide (3AXD50000034735 [English]).

1. See the dimensions in chapter

Dimension drawings

. Mark the locations for the four or six mounting holes.

Note : The lowest holes/mounting screws or bolts are not necessarily needed. If you use also them, you can replace the drive module without removing the cable entry box from the wall.

2. Drill the mounting holes.

3. Insert fixings anchors or plugs into the holes. Start the two upper bolts and the two lowest bolts into the anchors or plugs. Drive the bolts long enough into the wall to make them carry the weight of the drive.

4. Position the drive module onto the bolts on the wall.

5. Tighten the upper mounting bolts in the wall securely.

6. Remove the front cover.

7. Attach the cable entry box to the drive frame. For instructions, see the assembly drawing in the cable entry box. A view of frame R8 is shown below.

8. Tighten the lower mounting bolts in the wall securely.

54 Mechanical installation

IP21 (UL Type 1) R5 … R9

200 mm

(7.87”)

1

300 mm

(11.81”)

4

2

3

5

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

Screw size

M5

M8

M8

M8

M8

6

8

7

< 40 °C

Mechanical installation 55



Frames R1 to R9 (IP55, UL Type 12)

Note : Do not open or remove the cable entry box for easier installation. The gaskets do not fulfill the degree of protection if the box is opened.

1. See the dimensions in chapter

Dimension drawings

. Mark the locations for the four or six mounting holes. The lowest holes are not necessarily needed.

2. Drill the mounting holes.

3. Insert fixings anchors or plugs into the holes.

4. Start the upper bolts into the mounting holes. Drive the bolts long enough into the wall to make them carry the weight of the drive.

5. Position the drive onto the upper bolts on the wall. Lift the drive with another person as it is heavy.

6. For UL Type 12 drives of frames R4 to R9: Put the hood onto the upper bolts.

7. Tighten the upper bolts in the wall securely.

8. Start the lower bolts into the mounting holes.

9. Tighten the lower bolts in the wall securely.

56 Mechanical installation

IP55 (UL Type 12) R1…R9

200 mm

(7.87”)

3

1

300 mm

(11.81”)

2

R1…R5

R6…R9

Screw size

M5

M8

UL Type 12 (R4…R9 )

5

6

6

4

7

8

Mechanical installation 57

Flange mounting

See Flange mounting kit installation supplement (3AXD50000019100 [English]).

Cabinet installation

This section gives the basic cabinet installation instructions for the drive. For more information, see ACS880-01 +P940 drives for cabinet installation supplement

(3AUA0000145446 [English]).

Cooling

Make sure that there is sufficient cooling:

• Make sure that the temperature of the cooling air that goes into the drive does not exceed +40 °C (+104 °F).

• Prevent cooling air recirculation inside the cabinet. You can use air baffle plates or an extra fan at the inlet or outlet of the cabinet. if you use a fan, we recommend an inlet fan with a filter. Such a fan causes an overpressure inside the cabinet which helps to keep the dust out.

• Prevent cooling air recirculation outside the cabinet. Let the outlet air away from the inlet: to the other side of the cabinet or upwards.

• Make sure that there is sufficient cooling in the room in which the cabinet is placed .

4

3

6 2

4

5

6

1

2

3

Main air flow in

Main air flow out

Air baffle plate

Drive

Air inlet filter

Air outlet filter

5 1

58 Mechanical installation

Note : You can remove the front cover of the drive module for better cooling.

Grounding inside the cabinet

Leave the contact surfaces of the attaching points of the drive unpainted (bare metalto-metal contact). The drive frame will be grounded to the PE busbar of the cabinet via the attaching surfaces, screws and the cabinet frame. Alternatively, use a separate grounding conductor between the PE terminal of the drive and the PE busbar of the cabinet.

Installing drives above one another

Make sure that the outlet cooling air flows away from the drive above.

3

1 Air flow through the drive

2 Air baffle

3 Mounting plate that allows air through flow

4 Minimum spacing between the drives

4 1 2

max.+40 °C (+104 °F)

Planning the electrical installation 59

Planning the electrical installation

5

What this chapter contains

This chapter contains instructions for planning the electrical installation of the drive.

Some instructions are mandatory to follow in every installation, others provide useful information that only concerns certain applications.

Limitation of liability

The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if the recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover.

Selecting the supply disconnecting device

Install a hand-operated input disconnecting device between the AC power source and the drive. The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work.

60 Planning the electrical installation



European Union

To meet the European Union Directives, according to standard EN 60204-1, Safety of

Machinery , the disconnecting device must be one of the following types:

• switch-disconnector of utilization category AC-23B (EN 60947-3)

• disconnector that has an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector (EN 60947-3)

• circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947-2.



Other regions

The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations.

Selecting and dimensioning the main contactor

If a main contactor is used, its utilization category (number of operations under load) must be AC-1 according to IEC 60947-4, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear .

Dimension the main contactor according to the nominal voltage and current of the drive.

Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive

Use an asynchronous AC induction motor, permanent magnet synchronous motor,

AC induction servomotor or ABB synchronous reluctance motor (SynRM motor) with the drive. Several induction motors can be connected to the drive at a time.

Select the motor size and drive type from to the rating tables in chapter

Technical data on basis of the AC line voltage and motor load. Use the DriveSize PC tool if you

need to tune the selection more in detail.

Ensure that the motor withstands the maximum peak voltage in the motor terminals.

See the Requirements table on page 61 . For basics of protecting the motor insulation and bearings in drive systems, refer to section Protecting the motor insulation and bearings

below.

Note:

• Consult the motor manufacturer before using a motor whose nominal voltage differs from the AC line voltage connected to the drive input.

• The voltage peaks at the motor terminals are relative to the supply voltage of the drive, not the drive output voltage.

• If the motor and drive are not of the same size, consider the following operation limits of the drive control program:

• motor nominal voltage range 1/6 ... 2 · U

N

• motor nominal current range 1/6 ... 2 · I

N

0 ... 2 · I

N

of the drive in DTC control and

in scalar control. The control mode is selected by a drive parameter.

Planning the electrical installation 61



Protecting the motor insulation and bearings

The drive employs modern IGBT inverter technology. Regardless of frequency, the drive output comprises pulses of approximately the drive DC bus voltage with a very short rise time. The pulse voltage can almost double at the motor terminals, depending on the attenuation and reflection properties of the motor cable and the terminals. This can cause additional stress on the motor and motor cable insulation.

Modern variable speed drives with their fast rising voltage pulses and high switching frequencies can generate current pulses that flow through the motor bearings. This can gradually erode the bearing races and rolling elements.

Optional du/dt filters protect motor insulation system and reduce bearing currents.

Optional common mode filters mainly reduce bearing currents. Insulated N-end (nondrive end) bearings protect the motor bearings.



Requirements table

The following table shows how to select the motor insulation system and when an optional drive du/dt and common mode filters and insulated N-end (non-drive end) motor bearings are required. Ignoring the requirements or improper installation may shorten motor life or damage the motor bearings and voids the warranty.

62 Planning the electrical installation

Motor type

Nominal AC supply voltage

Motor insulation system

Requirement for

ABB du/dt and common mode filters, insulated N-end motor bearings

P

N

< 100 kW and frame size

< IEC 315

100 kW < P

N or

<

IEC 400

350 kW

IEC 315 < frame size <

P

N

< 134 hp and frame size

< NEMA 500

134 hp < P

N

< 469 hp or

NEMA 500 < frame size < NEMA 580

ABB motors

Randomwound

M2_,M3_ and M4_

U

N

< 500 V Standard

500 V < U

N

< 600 V Standard or

Reinforced -

-

+ du/dt

+ N

+ du/dt + N

600 V < U

N

< 690 V

(cable length <

150 m)

600 V < U

N

< 690 V

(cable length >

150 m)

Reinforced

380 V < U

N

< 690 V Standard

+ du/dt

Reinforced n.a.

Formwound

HX_ and

AM_

Old* formwound

HX_ and modular

380 V < U

N

< 690 V Check with the motor manufacturer.

Randomwound

HX_ and

AM_ **

HDP

*

0 V < U

N

< 500 V

500 V < U

N

< 690 V

Enamelled wire with fiber glass taping

Consult the motor manufacturer.

manufactured before 1.1.1998

+ N + CMF

+ du/dt + N + CMF

+ du/dt + N

+ N + CMF

+ du/dt with voltages over 500 V + N +

CMF

** For motors manufactured before 1.1.1998, check for additional instructions with the motor manufacturer.

Planning the electrical installation 63

Motor type

Nominal AC supply voltage

Motor insulation system

Requirement for

ABB du/dt and common mode filters, insulated N-end motor bearings

P

N

< 100 kW and frame size

< IEC 315

100 kW < P

N or

<

IEC 400

350 kW

IEC 315 < frame size <

P

N

< 134 hp and frame size

< NEMA 500

134 hp < P

N

< 469 hp or

NEMA 500 < frame size < NEMA 580

Non-ABB motors

Randomwound and formwound

U

N

< 420 V Standard:

Û

LL

= 1300 V

420 V < U

N

< 500 V Standard:

Û

LL

= 1300 V or

Reinforced:

Û

LL

0.2

= 1600 V, microsecond rise time

-

+ du/dt

-

+ N or CMF

+ du/dt + (N or CMF)

+ N or CMF

500 V < U

N

< 600 V Reinforced:

Û

LL

= 1600 V or

+ du/dt + du/dt + (N or CMF)

Reinforced:

Û

LL

= 1800 V

600 V < U

N

< 690 V Reinforced:

Û

LL

= 1800 V

Reinforced:

Û

LL

0.3

= 2000 V, microsecond rise time ***

-

+ du/dt

-

+ N or CMF

+ du/dt + N

N + CMF

*** If the intermediate DC circuit voltage of the drive is increased from the nominal level by resistor braking, check with the motor manufacturer if additional output filters are needed in the applied drive operation range.

64 Planning the electrical installation

The abbreviations used in the table are defined below.

Abbr.

U

N

Û

LL

P

N du/dt

CMF

N n.a.

Definition

Nominal AC line voltage

Peak line-to-line voltage at motor terminals which the motor insulation must withstand

Motor nominal power du/dt filter at the output of the drive. Available from ABB as an optional add-on kit.

Common mode filter. Depending on the drive type, CMF is available from ABB as an optional add-on kit.

N-end bearing: insulated motor non-drive end bearing

Motors of this power range are not available as standard units. Consult the motor manufacturer.

Additional requirements for explosion-safe (EX) motors

If you will use an explosion-safe (EX) motor, follow the rules in the requirements table above. In addition, consult the motor manufacturer for any further requirements.

Additional requirements for ABB motors of types other than M2_, M3_, M4_,

HX_ and AM_

Use the selection criteria given for non-ABB motors.

Additional requirements for the braking applications

When the motor brakes the machinery, the intermediate circuit DC voltage of the drive increases, the effect being similar to increasing the motor supply voltage by up to 20 percent. Consider this voltage increase when specifying the motor insulation requirements if the motor will be braking a large part of its operation time.

Example: Motor insulation requirement for a 400 V AC line voltage application must be selected as if the drive were supplied with 480 V.

Planning the electrical installation 65

Additional requirements for ABB high-output and IP23 motors

The rated output power of high output motors is higher than what is stated for the particular frame size in EN 50347 (2001). This table shows the requirements for ABB random-wound motor series (for example, M3AA, M3AP and M3BP).

Nominal mains voltage (AC line voltage)

Motor insulation system

U

N

< 500 V Standard

500 V < U

N

< 600 V Standard

-

Requirement for

ABB du/dt and common mode filters, insulated Nend motor bearings

P

N

< 100 kW 100 kW < P

N

200 kW

< P

N

> 200 kW

P

N

< 140 hp P

N

> 268 hp

+ du/dt

140 hp < P

N

268 hp

<

+ N

+ du/dt + N

+ N + CMF

+ du/dt + N +

CMF or

Reinforced

600 V < U

N

< 690 V Reinforced

-

+ du/dt

+ N

+ du/dt + N

+ N + CMF

+ du/dt + N +

CMF

66 Planning the electrical installation

Additional requirements for non-ABB high-output and IP23 motors

The rated output power of high output motors is higher than what is stated for the particular frame size in EN 50347 (2001). The table below shows the requirements for random-wound and form-wound non-ABB motors.

Nominal AC line voltage

Motor insulation system

Requirement for

ABB du/dt filter, insulated N-end bearing and ABB common mode filter

P

N

< 100 kW or frame size < IEC 315

100 kW < P

N or

< 350 kW

IEC 315 < frame size <

IEC 400

P

N

< 134 hp or frame size < NEMA 500

134 hp < P

N

NEMA 500 < frame size

< NEMA 580

+ N + CMF or

< 469 hp

U

N

< 420 V Standard: Û

LL

1300 V

= + N or CMF

420 V < U

N

< 500 V Standard: Û

LL

1300 V

= + du/dt + (N or CMF) + du/dt + N + CMF or

Reinforced:

Û

LL

0.2

= 1600 V, microsecond rise time

+ N or CMF

500 V < U

N

< 600 V Reinforced: Û

LL

= 1600 V

+ du/dt + (N or CMF)

+ N + CMF

+ du/dt + N + CMF or

Reinforced:

Û

LL

= 1800 V

600 V < U

N

< 690 V Reinforced:

Û

LL

= 1800 V

Reinforced:

Û

LL

0.3

= 2000 V, microsecond rise time ***

+ N or CMF

+ du/dt + N

N + CMF

+ N + CMF

+ du/dt + N + CMF

N + CMF

*** If the intermediate DC circuit voltage of the drive is increased from the nominal level by resistor braking, check with the motor manufacturer if additional output filters are needed in the applied drive operation range.

Planning the electrical installation 67

Additional data for calculating the rise time and the peak line-to-line voltage

If you need to calculate the actual peak voltage and voltage rise time considering the actual cable length, proceed as follows:

• Peak line-to line voltage: Read the relative Û

LL

/ U

N

value from the appropriate diagram below and multiply it by the nominal supply voltage ( U

N

).

• Voltage rise time: Read the relative values and substitute into equation t = 0.8 · Û

LL

Û

LL

/ U

N

and (du/dt)/U

N

from the appropriate diagram below. Multiply the values by the nominal supply voltage (U

N

/(du/dt).

)

68 Planning the electrical installation

A

3.0

2.5

2.0

1.5

Û

LL

/ U

N

1.0

du/dt

U

N

μ s)

0.5

0.0

100 200 300 l (m)

B

4.0

3.5

3.0

2.5

5.5

5.0

4.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

du/dt

UN

μ s)

Û

LL

/ U

N

100 200 300 l (m)

A

B

Drive with du/dt filter

Drive without du/dt filter l Motor cable length

Û

LL

/ U

N

(du/dt)/U

N

Relative peak line-to-line voltage

Relative du/dt value

Note : ÛLL and du/dt values are approximately 20% higher with resistor braking.

Planning the electrical installation 69

Additional note for sine filters

Sine filters protect the motor insulation system. Therefore, du/dt filter can be replaced with a sine filter. The peak phase-to-phase voltage with the sine filter is approximately

1.5 · U

N

.

Selecting the power cables



General rules

Select the input power and motor cables according to local regulations :

• Select a cable capable of carrying the drive nominal current. See section

Ratings

(page

150

) for the rated currents.

• Select a cable rated for at least 70

°

C maximum permissible temperature of conductor in continuous use.

For frame R3 drives with option +B056 (IP55, UL Type 12) and ambient temperature above 39 °C (102 °F), select a cable rated for at least 75

°

C maximum permissible temperature of conductor in continuous use.

For US, see Additional US requirements, page 75 .

• The inductance and impedance of the PE conductor/cable (grounding wire) must be rated according to permissible touch voltage appearing under fault conditions

(so that the fault point voltage will not rise excessively when a ground fault occurs).

• 600 V AC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC. 750 V AC cable is accepted for up to 600 V AC. For 690 V AC rated equipment, the rated voltage between the conductors of the cable should be at least 1 kV.

Use symmetrical shielded motor cable (see page

73

) for drive frame size R5 and larger, or motors larger than 30 kW (40 hp). A four-conductor system can be used up to frame size R4 with up to 30 kW (40 hp) motors, but shielded symmetrical motor cable is always recommended. Ground motor cable shields 360° at both ends. Keep the motor cable and its PE pigtail (twisted shield) as short as possible to reduce highfrequency electromagnetic emissions.

Note: When continuous metal conduit is employed, shielded cable is not required.

The conduit must have bonding at both ends.

A four-conductor system is allowed for input cabling, but shielded symmetrical cable is recommended.

Compared to a four-conductor system, the use of symmetrical shielded cable reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as the stress on motor insulation, bearing currents and wear.

The protective conductor must always have an adequate conductivity.

Unless local wiring regulations state otherwise, the cross-sectional area of the protective conductor must agree with the conditions that require automatic

70 Planning the electrical installation disconnection of the supply required in 411.3.2. of IEC 60364-4-41:2005 and be capable of withstanding the prospective fault current during the disconnection time of the protective device.

The cross-sectional area of the protective conductor can either be selected from the table below or calculated according to 543.1 of IEC 60364-5-54.

The table below shows the minimum cross-sectional area related to the phase conductor size according to IEC 61800-5-1 when the phase conductor and the protective conductor are made of the same metal. If this is not so, the cross-sectional area of the protective earthing conductor shall be determined in a manner which produces a conductance equivalent to that which results from the application of this table.

Cross-sectional area of the phase conductors

S (mm

2

)

S < 16

16 < S < 35

35 < S

Minimum cross-sectional area of the corresponding protective conductor

S p

(mm

2

)

S

16

S/2



Typical power cable sizes

The table below gives copper and aluminum cable types with concentric copper shield for the drives with nominal current.

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

Frame size

IEC 1)

Cu cable type mm 2

Al cable type mm 2

Cu cable type

US 2)

Al cable type

AWG/kcmil AWG/kcmil

046A-2

061A-2

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

R4

R5

R5

R6

R6

R7

R7

R2

R2

R3

R4

R1

R1

R1

R1

3×25

3×35

3×35

3×50

3×95

3×120

3×150

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×6

3×6

3×10

3×16

3×35

3×50

3×70

3×70

3×120

3×150

3×240

-

-

-

3×35

-

-

-

-

3

1

4

3

2/0

3/0

250 MCM

10

10

8

6

14

14

14

14

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Planning the electrical installation 71

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

Frame size

R8

IEC 1)

Cu cable type mm 2

2 × (3×95) 3)

Al cable type mm 2

2 × (3×120)

R4

R5

R5

R6

R2

R3

R3

R4

R1

R1

R1

R2

R1

R1

R1

R1

R6

R7

R7

R8

R8

R9

R9

072A-3

087A-3

105A-3

145A-3

169A-3

206A-3

246A-3

293A-3

363A-3

430A-3

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

274A-2

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3

03A3-3

04A0-3

05A6-3

07A2-3

09A4-3

12A6-3

017A-3

025A-3

032A-3

038A-3

045A-3

061A-3

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

R1

R1

R1

R1

R1

R1

R1

R2

R2

R3

R3

R4

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×6

3×6

3×10

3×10

3×16

3×25

3×35

3×35

3×50

3×95

3×120

3×150

2 × (3×70) 3)

2 × (3×95)

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×6

3×6

3×10

3×10

3×16

3)

2 × (3×120)

2 × (3×150)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3×25

-

-

-

3×35

3×35

3×50

3×70

3×70

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3×120

3×150

3×240

2 × (3×95)

2 × (3×120)

2 × (3×185)

2 × (3×240)

Cu cable type

US 2)

Al cable type

AWG/kcmil

2 × 3/0

AWG/kcmil

-

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

10

10

8

8

6

4

3

3

1

2/0

3/0

250 MCM

300 MCM

2 × 3/0

2 × 4/0

2 × 250 MCM

14

14

14

14

14

14

14

10

10

8

8

6

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

72 Planning the electrical installation

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

R5

R5

R5

R6

R5

R5

R5

R5

R3

R3

R5

R5

R3

R3

R3

R3

R6

R7

R7

R8

R8

R9

R9

042A-7

049A-7

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

210A-7

271A-7

027A-7

07A3-7

09A8-7

14A2-7

018A-7

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

302A-5

361A-5

414A-5

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7

09A9-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

R6

R7

R7

R8

R4

R5

R5

R6

R8

R9

R9

R9

Frame size

IEC 1)

Cu cable type mm 2

3×25

3×35

3×35

3×50

3×95

3×120

3×150

2 × (3×70) 3)

2 × (3×70) 3)

2 × (3×95)

2 × (3×120)

2 × (3×150)

Al cable type mm 2

3×25

3×35

3×50

3×70

3×95

3×150

3×185

2 × (3×95)

2 × (3×95)

2 × (3×120)

2 × (3×185)

2 × (3×240)

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×2.5

3×4

3×6

3×10

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×2.5

3×4

3×6

3×10

3×10

3×16

3×16

3×25

3×35

3×50

3×70

3×95

3×120

3)

3×185

3×240

3)

-

-

-

3×25

3×25

3×25

3×25

3×35

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3×50

3×70

3×95

3×120

2 × (3×70)

2 × (3×95)

2 × (3×120)

Cu cable type

US 2)

Al cable type

AWG/kcmil

4

3

3

1

2/0

3/0

250 MCM

300 MCM

2 × 2/0

2 × 3/0

2 × 250 MCM

2 × 250 MCM

AWG/kcmil

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

14

14

14

12

10

8

14

14

14

12

10

8

8

6

6

4

3

2

1/0

2/0

4/0

300 MCM

400 MCM

4

3

6

4

12

10

8

6

12

12

-

-

-

-

-

-

2

1/0

3/0

4/0

300

2 × 3/0

2 × 4/0

3AXD00000588487

Planning the electrical installation 73

1) The cable sizing is based on max. 9 cables laid on a cable ladder side by side, three ladder type trays one on top of the other, ambient temperature 30 °C, PVC insulation, surface temperature 70 °C (EN 60204-1 and IEC 60364-5-52/2001). For other conditions, size the cables according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the load current

of the drive. See also page 194 for the accepted cable sizes of the drive.

2) The cable sizing is based on NEC Table 310-16 for copper wires, 75 °C (167 °F) wire insulation at 40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature. Not more than three current-carrying conductors in raceway or cable or earth (directly buried). For other conditions, size the cables according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the load current

of the drive. See also page 195 for the accepted cable sizes of the drive.

3) The biggest cable size accepted by the connection terminals of frame R8 is 2 × (3×150).

Biggest possible cable size is 3x240 or 400 MCM if the terminal type is changed and the cable entry box is not used.



Alternative power cable types

The recommended and not allowed power cable types to be used with the drive are presented below.

Recommended power cable types

PE

Symmetrical shielded cable with three phase conductors and a concentric PE conductor as shield. The shield must meet the

requirements of IEC 61800-5-1, see page 69 . Check with local /

state / country electrical codes for allowance.

PE

Symmetrical shielded cable with three phase conductors and a concentric PE conductor as shield. A separate PE conductor is required if the shield does not meet the requirements of

IEC 61800-5-1, see page

69

.

PE

Symmetrical shielded cable with three phase conductors and symmetrically constructed PE conductor, and a shield. The PE conductor must meet the requirements of IEC 61800-5-1.

Power cable types for limited use

PE

A four-conductor system (three phase conductors and a protective conductor on a cable tray) is not allowed for motor cabling (it is allowed for input cabling).

74 Planning the electrical installation

PVC

EMT

A four-conductor system (three phase conductors and a PE conductor in a PVC conduit) is allowed for input and motor cabling with phase conductor cross-section less than

10 mm 2 (8 AWG) or motors < 30 kW (40 hp) . Not allowed in

USA.

Corrugated or EMT cable with three phase conductors and a protective conductor is allowed for motor cabling with phase conductor cross section less than 10 mm 2 (8 AWG) or motors <

30 kW (40 hp).

Not allowed power cable types

PE

Symmetrical shielded cable with individual shields for each phase conductor is not allowed on any cable size for input and motor cabling.

Planning the electrical installation 75



Motor cable shield

If the motor cable shield is used as the sole protective earth conductor of the motor, make sure that the conductivity of the shield is sufficient. See subsection

General rules on page 69 , or IEC 61800-5-1. To effectively suppress radiated and conducted

radio-frequency emissions, the cable shield conductivity must be at least 1/10 of the phase conductor conductivity. The requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminum shield. The minimum requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below. It consists of a concentric layer of copper wires with an open helix of copper tape or copper wire. The better and tighter the shield, the lower the emission level and bearing currents.

3 4 5

1

2

1

2

3

4

5

Insulation jacket

Copper wire screen

Helix of copper tape or copper wire

Inner insulation

Cable core



Additional US requirements

Use type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds or shielded power cable for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not used. For the

North American market, 600 V AC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC. 1000 V AC cable is required above 500 V AC (below 600 V AC). For drives rated over 100 amperes, the power cables must be rated for 75

°

C (167

°

F).

Conduit

Couple separate parts of a conduit together: bridge the joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint. Also bond the conduits to the drive enclosure and motor frame. Use separate conduits for input power, motor, brake resistor, and control wiring. When conduit is employed, type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable or shielded cable is not required. A dedicated ground cable is always required.

Note : Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit.

76 Planning the electrical installation

Armored cable / shielded power cable

Six conductor (3 phases and 3 ground) type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following suppliers (trade names in parentheses):

• Anixter Wire & Cable (Philsheath)

• BICC General Corp (Philsheath)

• Rockbestos Co. (Gardex)

• Oaknite (CLX).

Shielded power cables are available from Belden, LAPPKABEL (ÖLFLEX) and Pirelli.

Selecting the control cables



Shielding

All control cables must be shielded.

Use a double-shielded twisted pair cable for analog signals. This type of cable is recommended for the pulse encoder signals also. Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal. Do not use common return for different analog signals.

A double-shielded cable (figure a below) is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals but single-shielded (b) twisted pair cable is also acceptable.

a b



Signals in separate cables

Run analog and digital signals in separate, shielded cables.

Never mix 24 V DC and 115/230 V AC signals in the same cable.



Signals allowed to be run in the same cable

Relay-controlled signals, providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V, can be run in the same cables as digital input signals. The relay-controlled signals should be run as twisted pairs.



Relay cable type

The cable type with braided metallic screen (for example ÖLFLEX by LAPPKABEL,

Germany) has been tested and approved by ABB.

Planning the electrical installation 77



Control panel cable length and type

In remote use, the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed three meters (10 ft). Cable type: shielded CAT 5e or better Ethernet patch cable with

RJ-45 ends.

Routing the cables

Route the motor cable away from other cable routes. Motor cables of several drives can be run in parallel installed next to each other. The motor cable, input power cable and control cables should be installed on separate trays. Avoid long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables in order to decrease electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage.

Where control cables must cross power cables, ensure they are arranged at an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible. Do not run extra cables through the drive.

The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding electrodes. Aluminum tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of potential.

A diagram of the cable routing is shown below.

Drive

Motor cable

Power cable min 300 mm (12 in.)

Input power cable min 200 mm (8 in.) 90 °

Control cables

Motor cable min 500 mm (20 in.)

78 Planning the electrical installation



Separate control cable ducts

Lead 24 V and 230 V (120 V) control cables in separate ducts unless the 24 V cable is insulated for 230 V (120 V) or insulated with an insulation sleeving for 230 V

(120 V).

24 V

230 V

(120 V) 24 V

230 V

(120 V)



Continuous motor cable shield or enclosure for equipment on the motor cable

To minimize the emission level when safety switches, contactors, connection boxes or similar equipment are installed on the motor cable between the drive and the motor:

• European Union: Install the equipment in a metal enclosure with 360 degree grounding for the shields of both the incoming and outgoing cable, or connect the shields of the cables otherwise together.

• US: Install the equipment in a metal enclosure in a way that the conduit or motor cable shielding runs consistently without breaks from the drive to the motor.

Implementing thermal overload and short-circuit protection



Protecting the drive and input power cable in short-circuits

Protect the drive and input cable with fuses as follows:

~

~

M

3~

Planning the electrical installation 79

Size the fuses at the distribution board according to instructions given in chapter

Technical data

. The fuses will protect the input cable in short-circuit situations, restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short-circuit inside the drive.

Circuit breakers

The protective characteristics of circuit breakers depend on the type, construction and settings of the breakers. There are also limitations pertaining to the short-circuit capacity of the supply network. Your local ABB representative can help you in selecting the breaker type when the supply network characteristics are known.

WARNING!

Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit breakers, independent of the manufacturer, hot ionized gases can escape from the breaker enclosure in case of a short-circuit. To ensure safe use, pay special attention to the installation and placement of the breakers. Obey the manufacturer’s instructions.

You can use the circuit breakers listed below. Other circuit breakers can be used with drive if they provide the same electrical characteristics. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for the correct function and protection with circuit breakers not listed below. Furthermore, if the recommendations given by ABB are not obeyed, the drive can experience problems that warranty does not cover.

Note: Fuses must be used with circuit breakers in the USA.

Drive type

ACS880-01-

Frame size

ABB miniature circuit breaker ABB moulded case circuit breaker (Tmax)

Type kA

1)

Type kA

1)

046A-2

061A-2

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

R4

R5

R5

R6

R6

R7

R7

R2

R2

R3

R4

R1

R1

R1

R1

S 203 M/P-B/C 6

S 203 M/P-B/C 6

S 203 M/P-B/C 16

S 203 M/P-B/C 16

S 203 M/P-B/C 20

S 203 M/P-B/C 32

S 203 M/P-B/C 50

S 803 S-B/C 75

S 803 S-B/C 80

S 803 S-B/C 125

S 803 S-B/C 125

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

10

10

10

-

5

5

5

10

5

5

5

5

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1SDA067918R1

1SDA067918R1

1SDA067918R1

1SDA068555R1

1SDA068555R1

1SDA054141R1

65

65

65

-

65

65

65

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

80 Planning the electrical installation

Drive type

ACS880-01-

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

072A-3

087A-3

105A-3

145A-3

169A-3

206A-3

246A-3

293A-3

363A-3

430A-3

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

274A-2

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3

03A3-3

04A0-3

05A6-3

07A2-3

09A4-3

12A6-3

017A-3

025A-3

032A-3

038A-3

045A-3

061A-3

Frame size

R8

ABB miniature circuit breaker ABB moulded case circuit breaker (Tmax)

Type kA 1) Type kA 1)

1SDA054141R1 65

S 203 M/P-B/C 6

S 203 M/P-B/C 6

S 203 M/P-B/C 6

S 203 M/P-B/C 10

S 203 M/P-B/C 13

S 203 M/P-B/C 13

S 203 M/P-B/C 20

S 203 M/P-B/C 25

S 203 M/P-B/C 32

S 203 M/P-B/C 50

S 203 M/P-B/C 63

S 803 S-B/C 63

S 803 S-B/C 75

S 803 S-B/C 125

S 803 S-B/C 125

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

S 803 S-B/C 6

S 803 S-B/C 6

S 803 S-B/C 6

S 803 S-B/C 10

S 803 S-B/C 13

S 803 S-B/C 13

S 803 S-B/C 20

S 803 S-B/C 25

S 803 S-B/C 32

S 803 S-B/C 50

S 803 S-B/C 63

S 803 S-B/C 63

S 803 S-B/C 75

R4

R5

R5

R6

R2

R3

R3

R4

R1

R1

R1

R2

R1

R1

R1

R1

R6

R7

R7

R8

R8

R9

R9

R1

R1

R1

R2

R1

R1

R1

R1

R2

R3

R3

R4

R4

5

10

10

10

10

-

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1SDA067918R1

1SDA067918R1

1SDA068555R1

1SDA068555R1

1SDA068555R1

1SDA054141R1

1SDA054365R1

1SDA054420R1

1SDA054420R1

1SDA054420R1

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

65

65

65

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

65

65

65

65

65

65

65

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Planning the electrical installation 81

Drive type

ACS880-01-

027A-7

07A3-7

09A8-7

14A2-7

018A-7

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

042A-7

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

361A-5

414A-5

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7

09A9-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

049A-7

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

R5

R5

R5

R5

R5

R5

R3

R3

R5

R5

R3

R3

R3

R3

R7

R7

R8

R8

R5

R5

R6

R6

R9

R9

Frame size

ABB miniature circuit breaker ABB moulded case circuit breaker (Tmax)

Type kA 1) Type kA 1)

S 803 S-B/C 125

S 803 S-B/C 125

10

10

1SDA067918R1

1SDA067918R1

65

65

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1SDA068555R1

1SDA068555R1

1SDA068555R1

1SDA054141R1

65

65

65

65

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1SDA054420R1

1SDA054420R1

1SDA054420R1

1SDA054420R1

65

65

65

65

R5

R6

R6

R7

R7

R8

R8

S 803 S-B/C 13

S 803 S-B/C 20

S 803 S-B/C 25

S 803 S-B/C 32

S 803 S-B/C 50

S 803 S-B/C 63

S 803 S-B/C 13

S 803 S-B/C 20

S 803 S-B/C 25

S 803 S-B/C 32

S 803 S-B/C 50

S 803 S-B/C 63

S 803 S-B/C 63

S 803 S-B/C 80

S 803 S-B/C 80

S 803 S-B/C 125

S 803 S-B/C 125

-

-

-

-

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

3

3

-

-

-

1SDA067915R1

1SDA067915R1

1SDA067915R1

1SDA067916R1

1SDA067916R1

1SDA067916R1

1SDA067915R1

1SDA067915R1

1SDA067915R1

1SDA067916R1

1SDA067916R1

1SDA067916R1

1SDA067916R1

1SDA067917R1

1SDA054069R1

1SDA067917R1

1SDA054069R1

1SDA067918R1

1SDA054070R1

1SDA067918R1

1SDA054070R1

1SDA068555R1

1SDA054071R1

1SDA068555R1

1SDA054071R1

1SDA068555R1

1SDA054071R1

1SDA054141R1

35

20

35

20

35

20

35

20

35

20

35

35

18

18

35

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

82 Planning the electrical installation

Drive type

ACS880-01-

210A-7

271A-7

Frame size

R9

R9

ABB miniature circuit breaker ABB moulded case circuit breaker (Tmax)

Type kA 1) Type kA 1)

-

-

1SDA054365R1

1SDA054420R1

35

35

3AXD00000588487, 3AXD10000114581

1)

Maximum allowed rated conditional short-circuit current (IEC 61800-5-1) of the electrical power network



Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuits

The drive protects the motor cable and motor in a short-circuit situation when the motor cable is sized according to the nominal current of the drive. No additional protection devices are needed.



Protecting the drive and the input power and motor cables against thermal overload

The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload when the cables are sized according to the nominal current of the drive. No additional thermal protection devices are needed.

WARNING!

If the drive is connected to multiple motors, use a separate circuit breaker or fuses for protecting each motor cable and motor against overload.

The drive overload protection is tuned for the total motor load. It may not trip due to an overload in one motor circuit only



Protecting the motor against thermal overload

According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected. The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary. Depending on a drive parameter value, the function either monitors a calculated temperature value (based on a motor thermal model) or an actual temperature indication given by motor temperature sensors. The user can tune the thermal model further by feeding in additional motor and load data.

The most common temperature sensors are:

• motor sizes IEC180…225: thermal switch, eg, Klixon

• motor sizes IEC200…250 and larger: PTC or Pt100.

See the firmware manual for more information on the motor thermal protection, and the connection and use of the temperature sensors.

Planning the electrical installation 83

Protecting the drive against ground faults

The drive is equipped with an internal ground fault protective function to protect the unit against ground faults in the motor and motor cable. This is not a personnel safety or a fire protection feature. The ground fault protective function can be disabled with a parameter, refer to the firmware manual.



Residual current device compatibility

The drive is suitable to be used with residual current devices of Type B.

Note: The EMC filter of the drive includes capacitors connected between the main circuit and the frame. These capacitors and long motor cables increase the ground leakage current and may cause fault current circuit breakers to function.

Connecting drives to a common DC system

See ACS880-01 drives and ACS880-04 drive modules common DC systems application guide (3AUA0000127818 [English]).

Implementing the Emergency stop function

For safety reasons, install the emergency stop devices at each operator control station and at other operating stations where emergency stop may be needed. You can use the Safe torque off function of the drive to implement the Emergency stop

function. See chapter Safe Torque off function on page 235 .

Note: Pressing the stop key on the control panel of the drive does not generate an emergency stop of the motor or separate the drive from dangerous potential.

Implementing the Safe torque off function

See chapter

Safe Torque off function on page 235

.

Implementing the safety functions with the FSO module

The drive can be equipped with a safety functions module as factory installed (option

+Q973 or +Q972). The module is also available as a retrofilt kit. The safety functions module enables the implementation of functions such as Safe brake control (SBC),

Safe stop 1 (SS1), Safe stop emergency (SSE), Safely limited speed (SLS) and Safe maximum speed (SMS).

The settings of the FSO-xx are at default when delivered from the factory. The wiring of the external safety circuit and configuration of the FSO-xx module are the responsibility of the machine builder.

The FSO-xx reserves the standard Safe torque off (STO) connection of the drive control unit. STO can still be utilized by other safety circuits through the FSO-xx.

84 Planning the electrical installation

For the installation of the safety functions module, see section

Installation of safety functions modules on page 123 . For wiring instructions, safety data and more

information on the option, see FSO-12 safety functions module user’s manual

(3AXD50000015612 [English]) or FSO-21 safety functions module user’s manual

(3AXD50000015614 [English]).



Declaration of Conformity

See page

207

.

Implementing the ATEX-certified Safe motor disconnection function (option +Q971)

With option +Q971, the drive supplies ATEX-certified safe motor disconnection without contactor that uses the drive Safe torque off function. For more information, see ACS880 ATEX-certified Safe disconnection function application guide

(3AUA0000132231 [English]). See also section Deratings for special settings in the drive control program on page 162

.

Implementing the Power-loss ride-through function

Implement the power-loss ride-through function as follows:

• Check that the power-loss ride-through function of the drive is enabled with parameter 30.31 Undervoltage control in the ACS880 primary control program.

• If the installation is equipped with a main contactor, prevent its tripping at the input power break. For example, use a time delay relay (hold) in the contactor control circuit.

WARNING!

Make sure that the flying restart of the motor will not cause any danger. If you are in doubt, do not implement the Power-loss ride-through function.

Using power factor compensation capacitors with the drive

Power factor compensation is not needed with AC drives. However, if a drive is to be connected in a system with compensation capacitors installed, note the following restrictions.

WARNING!

Do not connect power factor compensation capacitors or harmonic filters to the motor cables (between the drive and the motor). They are not meant to be used with AC drives and can cause permanent damage to the drive or themselves.

Planning the electrical installation 85

If there are power factor compensation capacitors in parallel with the three phase input of the drive:

1. Do not connect a high-power capacitor to the power line while the drive is connected. The connection will cause voltage transients that may trip or even damage the drive.

2. If capacitor load is increased/decreased step by step when the AC drive is connected to the power line, ensure that the connection steps are low enough not to cause voltage transients that would trip the drive.

3. Check that the power factor compensation unit is suitable for use in systems with

AC drives, ie, harmonic generating loads. In such systems, the compensation unit should typically be equipped with a blocking reactor or harmonic filter.

Using a contactor between the drive and the motor

Implementing the control of the output contactor depends on how you select the drive

to operate. See also section Implementing a bypass connection on page 85

.

When you have selected to use DTC motor control mode and motor ramp stop, open the contactor as follows:

1. Give a stop command to the drive.

4. Wait until the drive decelerates the motor to zero speed.

5. Open the contactor.

When you have selected to use DTC motor control mode and motor coast stop, or scalar control mode, open the contactor as follows:

1. Give a stop command to the drive.

2. Open the contactor.

WARNING!

When the DTC motor control mode is in use, never open the output contactor while the drive controls the motor. The DTC motor control operates extremely fast, much faster than it takes for the contactor to open its contacts. When the contactor starts opening while the drive controls the motor, the

DTC control will try to maintain the load current by immediately increasing the drive output voltage to the maximum. This will damage, or even burn the contactor completely.

Implementing a bypass connection

If bypassing is required, employ mechanically or electrically interlocked contactors between the motor and the drive and between the motor and the power line. Make sure with interlocking that the contactors cannot be closed simultaneously. The

86 Planning the electrical installation installation must be clearly marked as defined in IEC/EN 61800-5-1, subclause 6.5.3, for example, “THIS MACHINE STARTS AUTOMATICALLY”.

WARNING!

Never connect the drive output to the electrical power network.

The connection may damage the drive.



Example bypass connection

An example bypass connection is shown below.

Q1 Drive main switch S11 Drive main contactor on/off control

Planning the electrical installation 87

Q4

K1

K4

Bypass circuit breaker

Drive main contactor

Bypass contactor

S40 Motor power supply selection (drive or direct-on-line)

S41 Start when motor is connected direct-online

S42 Stop when motor is connected direct-online

K5 Drive output contactor

Switching the motor power supply from drive to direct-on-line

1. Stop the drive and the motor with the drive control panel (drive in local control mode) or with the external stop signal (drive in remote control mode).

2. Open the main contactor of the drive with S11.

3. Switch the motor power supply from the drive to direct-on-line with S40.

4. Wait for 10 seconds to allow the motor magnetization to die away.

5. Start the motor with S41.

Switching the motor power supply from direct-on-line to drive

1. Stop the motor with S42.

2. Switch the motor power supply from direct-on-line to the drive with S40.

3. Close the main contactor of the drive with switch S11 (-> turn to position ST for two seconds and leave at position 1).

4. Start the drive and the motor with the drive control panel (drive in local control mode) or with the external start signal (drive in remote control mode).

Protecting the contacts of relay outputs

Inductive loads (relays, contactors, motors) cause voltage transients when switched off.

The relay contacts on the drive control unit are protected with varistors (250 V) against overvoltage peaks. In spite of this, it is highly recommended that inductive loads are equipped with noise attenuating circuits (varistors, RC filters [AC] or diodes

[DC]) in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch-off. If not suppressed, the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system.

Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible. Do not install protective components at the relay outputs.

88 Planning the electrical installation

1

230 V AC

2

230 V AC

3

+ 24 V DC

4

1) Relay outputs; 2) Varistor; 3) RC filter; 4) diode

-

Planning the electrical installation 89

Implementing a motor temperature sensor connection

WARNING! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non-conductive but not connected to the protective earth.

To connect a motor temperature sensor and other similar components to the drive, you have four alternatives:

1.

If there is double or reinforced insulation between the sensor and the live parts of the motor, you can connect the sensor directly to the inputs of the drive.

2.

If there is basic insulation between the sensor and the live parts of the motor, you can connect the sensor to the inputs of the drive if all circuits connected to the drive’s digital and analog inputs (typically extra-low voltage circuits) are protected against contact and insulated with basic insulation from other lowvoltage circuits. The insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive main circuit. Note that extra-low voltage circuits (such as 24 V DC) typically do not meet these requirements.

3.

You can connect the sensor to an extension module with basic insulation (eg,

FAIO-01) orreinforced insulation (eg, FPTC-xx) between the sensor connector and the other connectors of the module. See the table below for the sensor insulation requirement. For sensor connection to the extension module, see its manual.

4.

You can connect a sensor to an external thermistor relay the insulation of which is rated for the main circuit voltage of the drive.



Drive I/O, I/O extension and encoder interface modules

See sections:

•

section AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, PTC and KTY84 sensor inputs (XAI,

XAO)

on page

113

•

section DI6 (XDI:6) as PTC sensor input on page 115

• FPTC-01 thermistor protection module (option +L536) for ACS880 drives user’s manual (3AXD50000027750 [English])

• FPTC-02 ATEX-certified thermistor protection module Ex II (2) GD (option

+L537+Q971) for ACS880 drives user’s manual (3AXD50000027782 [English]).

90 Planning the electrical installation

This table shows what temperature sensor types you can connect to the drive I/O extension modules as well as the insulation requirement for the sensor.

Extension module

Type Insulation/Isolation

Temperature sensor type

PTC KTY Pt100,

Pt1000

X X

Temperature sensor insulation requirement

Reinforced insulation FIO-

11

FENxx

FAIO-

01

FPTC

-xx

Galvanic isolation between sensor connector and other connectors (including drive control unit connector)

Galvanic isolation between sensor connector and other connectors (including drive control unit connector)

Basic insulation between sensor connector and drive control unit connector. No insulation between sensor connector and other IO connectors.

Reinforced insulation between sensor connector and other connectors (including drive control unit connector).

X

X

X

X

X

-

-

X

-

Reinforced insulation

Basic insulation.

Connectors of extension module other than sensor connector must be left unconnected.

No special requirement

Note : The inaccuracy of the drive analog inputs for Pt100 sensors is 10 °C (18 °F). If a better accuracy is needed, use the FAIO-01 analog I/O extension module (option

+L525).

Electrical installation

Electrical installation 91

6

What this chapter contains

This chapter gives instructions on wiring the drive.

Warnings

WARNING!

Only qualified electricians are allowed to carry out the work described in this chapter. Follow the

Safety instructions in the first chapter of

this manual. Ignoring the safety instructions can cause physical injury or death.

Checking the insulation of the assembly



Drive

Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory. Also, there are voltagelimiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically.



Input power cable

Check the insulation of the input cable according to local regulations before connecting it to the drive.

92 Electrical installation



Motor and motor cable

Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows:

1. Check that the motor cable is disconnected from the drive output terminals T1/U,

T2/V and T3/W.

2. Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and then between each phase conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 1000 V DC. The insulation resistance of an ABB motor must exceed 100 Mohm (reference value at 25 °C or 77 °F). For the insulation resistance of other motors, please consult the manufacturer’s instructions. Note:

Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance. If moisture is suspected, dry the motor and repeat the measurement.

ohm ohm

U1

V1

M

3~

W1 PE



Brake resistor assembly

Check the insulation of the brake resistor assembly (if present) as follows:

1. Check that the resistor cable is connected to the resistor, and disconnected from the drive output terminals R+ and R-.

2. At the drive end, connect the R+ and R- conductors of the resistor cable together.

Measure the insulation resistance between the combined conductors and the PE conductor by using a measuring voltage of 1 kV DC. The insulation resistance must be higher than 1 Mohm.

R+ ohm

R-

PE

Electrical installation 93

Checking the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner-grounded TN systems

30 ohms] power system), otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive. This can cause danger, or damage the drive.

WARNING! Do not install the drive with EMC filter +E200 or +E202 on an IT system (an ungrounded power system or a high-resistance-grounded [over

WARNING! Do not install the drive with the ground-to-phase varistor connected on an IT system (an ungrounded power system or a highresistance-grounded [over 30 ohms] power system), otherwise the varistor circuit can be damaged.



EMC filter

Drive EMC filters +E200 and +E202 are not suitable for use in an IT (ungrounded) system. Disconnect the filter before you connect the drive to the supply network. For instructions, see EMC filter and ground-to-phase varistor disconnecting instructions for ACS880-01 drives (3AUA0000125152 [English]).



Ground-to-phase varistor

The ground-to-phase varistor of the drive is not suitable for use on an IT

(ungrounded) system. Disconnect the varistor before you connect the drive to the supply network. For instructions, see EMC filter and ground-to-phase varistor disconnecting instructions for ACS880-01 drives (3AUA0000125152 [English]).



690 V drives

Do not install 690 V drives on corner-grounded TN systems or corner-grounded IT systems.

94 Electrical installation

Connecting the power cables



Connection diagram

ACS880-01

PE

2b

L1 L2 L3

2a

3

R-

UDC+

R+ UDCT1/U T2/V T3/W

3 4

7

5

1

(PE) PE (PE) L1 L2 L3

U1

V1

W1

3 ~ M

6

1 For alternatives, see section

Selecting the supply disconnecting device

on page

59.

2 Use a separate grounding PE cable (2a) or a cable with a separate PE conductor (2b) if the conductivity of the shield does not meet the requirements for the PE conductor

(see page

69

).

3 360-degree grounding is recommended if shielded cable is used. Ground the other end of the input cable shield or PE conductor at the distribution board.

4 360-degree grounding is required.

5 External brake resistor

6 Use a separate grounding cable if the shield does not meet the requirements of

IEC 61800-5-1 (see page

69

) and there is no symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the cable (see page

75 ).

7 du/dt filter or sine filter (optional, see page

263 ).

Note:

If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor on the motor cable in addition to the conductive shield, connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the drive and motor ends.

Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable for motors above 30 kW (see page

69 ).

Connecting its fourth conductor at the motor end increases bearing currents and causes extra wear.

Electrical installation 95



Connection procedure for frames R1 to R3

1. Undo the mounting screws at the sides of the front cover.

2. Remove the cover by sliding it forward.

3. Attach the residual voltage warning sticker in the local language to the control panel mounting platform.

4. Remove the rubber grommets from the lead-through plate for the cables to be connected.

5. IP21 units: Fasten the cable connectors (included in the delivery in a plastic bag) to the cable lead-through plate holes.

6. Prepare the input power and motor cable ends as illustrated in the figure. Note :

Bare shield will be grounded 360 degrees.

7. IP21 units: Ground the shields 360 degrees in the connectors by tightening the connector onto the stripped part of the cable. IP55 units: Tighten the clamps onto the stripped part of the cables. Mind the sharp edges.

8. Connect the twisted shields of the power cables to the grounding terminals.

9. Connect the additional PE conductor (if used, see page

15

) of the input cable to the grounding terminal.

10. Connect the phase conductors of the input cable to the L1, L2 and L3 terminals and the phase conductors of the motor cable to the T1/U, T2/V and T3/W terminals. Connect the brake resistor conductors (if present) to the R+ and R- terminals. Tighten the screws to the torque given in the figure below.

11. Install the control cable grounding shelf in the cable entry box.

12. Secure the cables outside the unit mechanically.

Note : For US cable conduit installation, see the quick installation guide.

96 Electrical installation

R1…R3

10

IP21

IP55

1

2

1

3

1

5

4

R1…R3

6

PE

PE

6

PE

9

8

6

PE

Electrical installation 97

8

8

8

10

9

10 8

R1

R2

R3

L1, L2, L3, T1/U,

T2/V, T3/W, R-,

R+/UDC+, UDC

(N·m)

0.6

0.6

1.7

(N·m)

1.8

1.8

1.8

7

98 Electrical installation

11



Connection procedure for frames R4 and R5

1. Remove the front cover. IP21 units: Release the retaining clip with a screwdriver

(a) and lift the cover from the bottom outwards (b).

2. For IP21 drives: Remove the cable entry box cover by undoing the mounting screw.

3. For frame R4: Remove the EMC shroud that separates the input and output cabling if needed for easier installation.

4. Remove the shroud on the power cable terminals by releasing the clips and lifting the shroud up from the sides with a screwdriver (a).

Knock out holes in the shroud for the cables to be installed (b).

5. Attach the residual voltage warning sticker in the local language next to the control unit top.

6. Cut adequate holes into the rubber grommets. Slide the grommets onto the cables. Slide the cables through the holes of the bottom plate and attach the grommets to the holes.

7. Prepare the ends of the input power and motor cables as illustrated in the figure.

Note : Bare shield will be grounded 360 degrees under the grounding clamp.

8. Ground the cable shields 360 degrees under the grounding clamps. Mind the sharp edges.

9. Connect the twisted cable shields to the grounding terminals.

10. Connect the phase conductors of the input cable to the L1, L2 and L3 terminals and the phase conductors of the motor cable to the T1/U, T2/V and T3/W terminals. Tighten the screws to the torque given in the figure below.

Note for aluminum cables: Apply grease onto the conductor ends before you put them into the terminals.

Electrical installation 99

Note for cable lug installation (frame R5): Detach the connector and install a cable lug to the terminal post as follows:

• Remove the combi screw that attaches the connector to its terminal post and pull the connector off.

• Attach the cable lug to the conductor.

• Put the cable lug onto the terminal post. Start the nut, and turn it at least two rotations by hand.

WARNING! Before using tools, make sure that the nut/screw is not crossthreading. Cross-threading will damage the drive and cause danger.

• Tighten the nut to a torque of 5 N·m.

11. Install the EMC shroud separating the input and output cabling if not installed yet.

12. Units with option +D150: Slide the brake resistor cable through the brake resistor and control cable clamp assembly. Connect the conductors to the R+ and R- terminals and tighten to the torque given in the figure.

13. Reinstall the shroud on the power terminals.

14. Secure the cables outside the unit mechanically. Install the rubber grommets to the unused lead-through plate holes.

Note for US cable conduit installation: See the quick installation guide. In case of a cable lug installation, use UL listed cable lugs and tools to agree with UL

requirements. See page 196

.

100 Electrical installation

R4, R5

1b

1a

3

2

IP55

1

IP21

3

4

4b

4a

R4, R5

5

6

PE

Electrical installation 101

PE

7

6

7

6

102 Electrical installation

R4, R5

10

9

9

10

8

R4

R5

L1, L2, L3, T1/U,

T2/V, T3/W

(N·m)

3.3

5.6

R-, R+/UDC+,

UDC-

(N·m)

3.3

5.6

(N·m)

2.9

2.9

12

9

11

13

Electrical installation 103



Connection procedure for frames R6 to R9

Note : For frames R6 to R9 with option +H358, see also ACS880-01 +H358 UK gland plate frames R6 to R9 installation guide (3AXD50000034735 [English]).

1. Remove the front cover: For IP21 drives: Release the retaining clip with a screwdriver (a) and pull the cover by the bottom outwards (b).

2. For IP21 drives: Remove the cable entry box cover by undoing the mounting screws.

3. Attach the residual voltage warning sticker in the local language next to the control unit.

4. Remove the side plates of the cable entry box by undoing the mounting screws.

5. Remove the shroud on the power cable terminals by releasing the clips on the sides with a screwdriver and lifting (a). Knock out holes for the cables to be installed (b).

6. If parallel cables are installed (frames R8 and R9): Knock out the shrouds on the power cable terminals for the cables to be installed.

7. Prepare the ends of the input power and motor cables as illustrated in the figure.

Note : Bare shield will be grounded 360 degrees under the clamp.

8. Cut adequate holes into the rubber grommets (a). Slide the grommets onto the cables. Slide the cables through the holes of the bottom plate and attach the grommets to the holes (b).

9. Tighten the clamp onto the stripped part of the cable. Mind the sharp edges.

10. Fasten the twisted shields of the cables under the grounding clamps.

11. Connect the phase conductors of the input cable to the L1, L2 and L3 terminals and the phase conductors of the motor cable to the T1/U, T2/V and T3/W terminals. Tighten the screws to the torque given in the figure.

Note 1 for frames R8 and R9: if you put only one conductor to the connector, we recommend that you put it under the upper pressure plate.

Note 2 for frames R8 and R9: We do not recommend that you detach the connectors. If you do, detach and reinstall the connector as follows.

L1, L2 and L3 terminals

• Remove the combi screw that attaches the connector to its terminal post, and pull the connector off.

• Put the conductor under the connector pressure plate and pretighten the conductor.

• Put the connector back onto the terminal post. Start the combi screw, and turn it at least two rotations by hand.

104 Electrical installation

WARNING! Before using tools, make sure that the nut/screw is not crossthreading. Cross-threading will damage the drive and cause danger.

• Tighten the combi screw to a torque of 30 N·m.

• Tighten the conductor(s) to 40 N·m for frame R8 or to 70 N·m for frame R9.

T1/U, T2/V and T3/W terminals

• Remove the nut that attaches the connector to its busbar.

• Put the conductor under the connector pressure plate and pretighten the conductor.

• Put the connector back to its busbar. Start the nut, and turn it at least two rotations by hand.

WARNING! Before using tools, make sure that the nut/screw is not crossthreading. Cross-threading will damage the drive and cause danger.

• Tighten the nut to a torque of 30 N·m.

• Tighten the conductor(s) to 40 N·m for frame R8 or to 70 N·m for frame R9.

Note for cable lug installation (frames R6 to R9): Detach the connector and install a cable lug to the terminal post / busbar as follows:

• Remove the combi screw that attaches the connector to its terminal post / busbar, and pull the connector off.

• Attach the cable lug to the conductor.

• Put the cable lug onto the terminal post / busbar. Start the nut, and turn it at least two rotations by hand.

WARNING! Before using tools, make sure that the nut/screw is not crossthreading. Cross-threading will damage the drive and cause danger.

• Tighten the nut to a torque of 16 N·m (frames R6 and R7) and to a torque of

30 N·m (frames R8 and R9).

12. Units with option +D150: Connect the brake resistor cable conductors to the R+ and R- terminals.

13. If parallel cables are installed (frames R8 and R9), install the grounding shelves for them. Repeat steps 8 to 12.

14. Reinstall the shroud on the power terminals.

15. Reinstall the side plates of the cable entry box.

16. Install the control cable grounding shelf in the cable entry box.

Electrical installation 105

17. Secure the cables outside the unit mechanically. Install the rubber grommets to the unused lead-through plate holes.

Note for US cable conduit installation: See the quick installation guide. In case of a cable lug installation, use UL listed cable lugs and tools to agree with UL

requirements. See page 196

.

106 Electrical installation

R6 … R9

1b

1a

3

3

IP21

4

5a

5b

4

IP55

R6 … R9

PE

R8, R9

Electrical installation 107

6

PE

7

8a

7

108 Electrical installation

R6 … R9

11 12

11

10 10 10

9

Frame L1, L2, L3, T1/U,

T2/V, T3/W

R-, R+/UDC+,

UDC-

T (Wire screw) T (Wire screw)

M… N·m M… N·m

R6

R7

R8

R9

M10 M8

M10 40 (30*) M10

M10

M12

30

40

70

M10

M12

20

30

40

70

* for 525…690 V drives

T

N·m

9.8

9.8

9.8

9.8

R6 … R9

13

Electrical installation 109

R8, R9

16

110 Electrical installation



Grounding the motor cable shield at the motor end

Always ground the motor cable shield at the motor end. For minimum radio frequency interference, ground the motor cable shield 360 degrees at the lead-through of the motor terminal box.

DC connection

The UDC+ and UDC- terminals are intended for common DC configurations of a number of drives, allowing regenerative energy from one drive to be utilized by the other drives in motoring mode. Contact your local ABB representative for further instructions.

Connecting the control cables

See section

Default I/O connection diagram

below for the default I/O connections of the Factory macro of ACS880 primary control program. For other macros and control programs, see the firmware manual. Connect the cables as described under

Control cable connection procedure

on page

116 .

Electrical installation 111



Default I/O connection diagram

Wire sizes:

0.5 … 2.5 mm

2

(24…12 AWG)

Tightening torques: 0.5 N·m

(5 lbf·in) for both stranded and solid wiring.

See the next page for the notes.

Fault

XPOW External power input

1

2

+24VI

GND

24 V DC, 2 A

XAI Reference voltage and analog inputs

1

2

3

+VREF 10 V DC, R

L

1…10 kohm

-VREF -10 V DC, R

L

AGND Ground

1…10 kohm

1

2

3

4

4

5

6

7

J1

AI1+

AI1-

AI2+

AI2-

J1

Speed reference 0(2)…10 V, R

200 kohm 1) in

>

By default not in use. 0(4)…20 mA, R

100 ohm 2)

AI1 current/voltage selection jumper

J2

XAO

J2

Analog

AI2 current/voltage selection jumper outputs in

=

AO1

AGND

AO2

AGND

Motor speed rpm 0…20 mA, R

L

500 ohm

<

Motor current 0…20 mA, R

L

< 500 ohm

XD2D Drive-to-drive link

1 B

2 A Drive-to-drive link

3

J3

BGND

J3 Drive-to-drive link termination switch

XRO1, XRO2, XRO3 Relay outputs

11

12

13

21

22

23

NC

COM

NO

NC

COM

NO

Ready

250 V AC / 30 V DC

2 A

Running

250 V AC / 30 V DC

2 A

31

32

33

NC

COM

NO

Faulted(-1)

250 V AC / 30 V DC

2 A

XD24 Digital interlock

1

2

DIIL Run enable

+24VD +24 V DC 200 mA 3)

3

4

5

J6

DICOM Digital input ground

+24VD +24 V DC 200 mA

3)

DIOGND Digital input/output ground

Ground selection switch

XDIO Digital input/outputs

1 DIO1 Output: Ready

2 DIO2 Output: Running

XDI Digital inputs

1

2

DI1

DI2

Stop (0) / Start (1)

Forward (0) / Reverse (1)

3

4

5

DI3

DI4

DI5

Reset

Acceleration & deceleration select

Constant speed 1 (1 = On)

6 DI6 By default not in use.

XSTO Safe torque off

4)

1

2

3

4

OUT1

SGND

IN1

IN2

Safe torque off. Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start.

X12 Safety functions module connection

X13 Control panel connection

X205 Memory unit connection

112 Electrical installation

Notes:

1) Current [0(4)…20 mA, R in

= 100 ohm] or voltage [ 0(2)…10 V, R with jumper J1. Change of setting requires reboot of control unit.

in

> 200 kohm] input selected

2) Current [0(4)…20 mA, R in

= 100 ohm] or voltage [ 0(2)…10 V, R with jumper J2. Change of setting requires reboot of control unit.

in

> 200 kohm] input selected

3) Total load capacity of these outputs is 4.8 W (200 mA / 24 V) minus the power taken by DIO1 and DIO2.

4) 0 = open, 1 = closed

DI4 Ramp times according to

0 Parameters 23.12 and 23.13

1 Parameters 23.14 and 23.15

Further information on the usage of the connectors and jumpers is given in the sections below.

See also section

Control unit (ZCU-12) connection data on page 198 .

Jumpers and switches

Jumper/

Switch

J1

(AI1)

Description

Determines whether analog input AI1 is used as a current or voltage input.

Positions

Current (I)

Voltage (U)

J2

(AI2)

Determines whether analog input AI2 is used as a current or voltage input.

Current (I)

Voltage (U)

J3

J6

Drive-to-drive link termination. Must be set to terminated position when the drive is the last unit on the link.

Common digital input ground selection switch.

Determines whether DICOM is separated from

DIOGND (ie, common reference for digital

inputs floats). See Ground isolation diagram on page 201

.

Bus is terminated.

Bus is not terminated.

DICOM and DIOGND connected (default).

DICOM and DIOGND separated.

Electrical installation 113

External power supply for the control unit (XPOW)

External +24 V (2 A) power supply for the control unit can be connected to terminal block XPOW. Using an external supply is recommended if

• the control board needs to be kept operational during input power breaks, for example, due to continuous fieldbus communication

• immediate restart is needed after power breaks (that is, no control board power up delay is allowed).

AI1 and AI2 as Pt100, Pt1000, PTC and KTY84 sensor inputs (XAI, XAO)

Three Pt100, Pt1000 and PTC sensors or one KTY84 sensor for motor temperature measurement can be connected between an analog input and output as shown below. Leave the other end of the shield unconnected or ground it indirectly via a few nanofarads high-frequency capacitor, for example, 3.3 nF / 630 V. The shield can also be grounded directly at both ends if they are in the same ground line with no significant voltage drop between the end points.

1…3 × Pt100/Pt1000/PTC or 1 × KTY

T T T

XAI

AIn+

AIn-

1)

XAO

AOn

AGND

2)

1) Set the input type to voltage with switch J1 for analog input AI1or with J2 for analog input

AI2. Set the appropriate analog input unit to V (volt) in parameter group 12 Standard AI .

2) Select the excitation mode in parameter group 13 Standard AO .

WARNING! As the inputs pictured above are not insulated according to

IEC 60664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor. If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement, the I/O board terminals must be protected against contact and must not be connected to other equipment or the temperature sensor must be isolated from the I/O terminals.

114 Electrical installation

Drive-to-drive link (XD2D)

The drive-to-drive link is a daisy-chained RS-485 transmission line that allows basic master/follower communication with one master drive and multiple followers.

Set termination activation jumper J3 (see section

Jumpers and switches

above) next to this terminal block to the ON position on the drives at the ends of the drive-to-drive link. On intermediate drives, set the jumper to the OFF position.

Use shielded twisted-pair cable (~100 ohm, for example, PROFIBUS-compatible cable) for the wiring. For best immunity, high quality cable is recommended. Keep the cable as short as possible; the maximum length of the link is 50 meters (164 ft). Avoid unnecessary loops and running the cable near power cables (such as motor cables).

The following diagram shows the wiring of the drive-to-drive link.

. . .

. . .

. . .

. . .

J3 J3 J3

DIIL input (XD24:1)

The DIIL input can be selected as the source of, for example, an emergency stop command or an external event. See the firmware manual for more information.

Electrical installation 115

DI6 (XDI:6) as PTC sensor input

A PTC sensor can be connected to this input for motor temperature measurement as follows. The sensor resistance must not exceed the threshold resistance of the digital input at the motor normal operating temperature. Do not connect both ends of the cable shield directly to ground. Leave the other end of the shield unconnected or ground it indirectly via a few nanofarads high-frequency capacitor, for example, 3.3 nF / 630 V. The shield can also be grounded directly at both ends if they are in the same ground line with no significant voltage drop between the end points. See the firmware manual for parameter settings.

T

PTC

+24VD

DI6 “0” > 4 kohm

“1” < 1.5 kohm

I max

= 5 mA

WARNING! As the inputs pictured above are not insulated according to

IEC 60664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor. If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement, the I/O board terminals must be protected against contact and must not be connected to other equipment or the temperature sensor must be isolated from the I/O terminals.

Safe torque off (XSTO)

For the drive to start, both connections (OUT1 to IN1 and IN2) must be closed. By default, the terminal block has jumpers to close the circuit. Remove the jumpers

before connecting an external Safe torque off circuitry to the drive. See page 235 .

Safety functions module connection (X12)

See section Implementing the safety functions with the FSO module on page 83

, and

FSO-12 safety functions module user’s manual (3AXD50000015612 [English]) or

FSO-21 safety functions module user’s manual (3AXD50000015614 [English]).

116 Electrical installation



Control cable connection procedure

WARNING! Follow the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Remove the front cover(s). See section

Connecting the power cables

starting from page

94

.

3. Cut adequate holes into the rubber grommets and slide the grommets onto the cables. Slide the cables through the holes of the bottom plate and attach the grommets to the holes.

4. Route the cables as shown on page

117

.

5. Ground the outer shields of all control cables 360 degrees at a grounding clamp in the cable entry box, see page

117

. Tighten the clamp to 1.5 N·m (13 lbf·in). Keep the shields continuous as close to the terminals of the control unit as possible.

Secure the cables mechanically at the clamps below the control unit. Frames R1 to R3: Ground also the pair-cable shields and grounding wires at the cable entry box grounding clamp.

6. Frames R4 to R9: Ground the pair-cable shields and all grounding wires to the

clamp below the control unit, see page 117

.

7. Connect the conductors to the appropriate terminals (see page 111)

of the control unit and tighten to 0.5 N·m (5 lbf·in).

8. For connecting the fieldbus cables, see appropriate quick installation guide:

ACS880-01 quick installation guide for frames R1 to R3

ACS880-01 quick installation guide for frames R4 and R5

ACS880-01 quick installation guide for frames R6 to R9

3AUA0000085966

3AUA0000099663

3AUA0000099689

Note:

• Leave the other ends of the control cable shields unconnected or ground them indirectly via a high-frequency capacitor with a few nanofarads, eg, 3.3 nF / 630 V.

The shield can also be grounded directly at both ends if they are in the same ground line with no significant voltage drop between the end points.

• Keep any signal wire pairs twisted as close to the terminals as possible. Twisting the wire with its return wire reduces disturbances caused by inductive coupling.

Electrical installation 117

0.5 N·m

1.5 N·m

6

7

7

5

1.5 N·m

3 3

118 Electrical installation

Connecting a PC

WARNING!

Do not connect the PC directly to the control panel connector of the control unit as this can cause damage.

Connect a PC to the drive with an USB data cable (USB Type A <-> USB Type Mini-

B) as follows:

1. Lift the USB connector cover from bottom upwards.

2. Insert the USB cable Mini-B plug in the control panel USB connector.

3. Insert the USB cable A-plug in the USB connector of the PC. -> The panel displays: USB connected.

1

2

3

Electrical installation 119

Controlling several drives through panel bus

One control panel (or PC) can be used to control several drives by constructing a panel bus.

1. Connect the panel to one drive using an Ethernet (eg. CAT5E) cable.

Note for IP55 (UL Type 12) drives: Remove the front cover and put the cables through the control cable lead-throughs.

• Use Menu – Settings – Edit texts – Drive to give a descriptive name to the drive.

• Use parameter 49.01

to assign the drive with a unique node ID number.

• Set other parameters in group 49 if necessary.

• Use parameter 49.06

to validate any changes.

Repeat the above for each drive.

2. With the panel connected to one drive, link the drives together using Ethernet cables. (Each panel platform has two connectors.)

3. In the last drive, switch bus termination on. With a panel platform, move the terminating switch into the outer position.Termination should be off on all other units.

4. On the control panel, switch on the panel bus functionality ( Options – Select drive – Panel bus ). The unit to be controlled can now be selected from the list under Options – Select drive .

5. If a PC is connected to the control panel, the drives on the panel bus are automatically displayed in the Drive composer tool.

6. For IP55 (UL Type 12) drives, Install the front cover.

120 Electrical installation

1

IP21 (UL Type 1)

1 2 3

IP55 (UL Type 12)

1

2

3

Electrical installation 121

Installing optional modules

Note: In frames R1 and R2, 90° connector cannot be used in Slot 1. In other frames, there is 50 to 55 mm free space for the connector and its cable available on Slots 1, 2 and 3.



Mechanical installation of I/O extension, fieldbus adapter and pulse encoder interface modules

See page

32 for the available slots for each module. Install the optional modules as

follows:

WARNING! Follow the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Remove the front cover (see the section Connecting the power cables

starting

from page 94 .

3. Frames R1 to R3: Pull the control panel mounting platform upwards to gain access to the optional module slots.

4. Insert the module carefully into its position on the control unit.

5. Tighten the mounting screw torque of 0.8 N·m. Note: The screw tightens the connections and grounds the module. It is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module.

122 Electrical installation

3

5

4



Wiring I/O extension, fieldbus adapter and pulse encoder interface modules

See the appropriate optional module manual for specific installation and wiring instructions. See page

117

for the routing of the cables.

Electrical installation 123



Installation of safety functions modules

The safety functions module can be mounted onto Slot 2 on the control unit or, in frames R7 to R9, also next to the control unit.

Installation procedure into Slot 2

WARNING! Follow the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Remove the front cover (see the section Connecting the power cables

on page

94

).

3. Frames R1 to R3: Pull the control panel mounting platform upwards to gain access to the optional module slots.

4. Insert the module carefully into its position on the control unit.

5. Attach the module with four screws. Note: The grounding screw (a) is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module.

6. Tighten the grounding screw of the electronics to 0.8 N·m.

7. Connect the data communication cable to slot X110 on the module and to connector X12 on the drive control unit.

8. Connect the Safe torque off wires to connector X111 on the module and to

connector XSTO on the drive module control unit as shown in section Wiring on page 236 .

9. Connect the external +24 V power supply cable to connector X112.

10. Connect the other wires as shown in FSO-12 safety functions module user’s manual (3AXD50000015612 [English]) or in FSO-21 safety functions module user’s manual (3AXD50000015614 [English]).

124 Electrical installation

X12

3

5

6

5

5a

5

Electrical installation 125

Installation next to the control unit on frames R7 to R9

WARNING! Follow the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Remove the front cover (see page 106 ).

3. Insert the module carefully into its position.

4. Attach the module with four screws. Note: Correct installation of the grounding screw (a) is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module.

5. Tighten the grounding screw of the electronics to 0.8 N·m.

6. Connect the data communication cable to slot X110 on the module and to connector X12 on the drive control unit.

7. Connect the Safe torque off wires to connector X111 on the module and to

connector XSTO on the drive module control unit as shown in section Wiring

on

page 236 .

8. Connect the external +24 V power supply cable to connector X112.

9. Connect the other wires as shown in FSO-12 safety functions module user’s manual (3AXD50000015612 [English]) or in FSO-21 safety functions module user’s manual (3AXD50000015614 [English]).

126 Electrical installation

X12

1

6

5 4

4a

4

4

Installation checklist

Installation checklist 127

7

What this chapter contains

This chapter contains a list for checking the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive.

Checklist

Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start-up. Go through the checklist together with another person.

WARNING!

Only qualified electricians are allowed to carry out the work described below. Follow the complete safety instructions of the drive. Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death. Open the main disconnector of the drive and lock it to open position. Measure to ensure that the drive is not powered.

Check that …

The ambient operating conditions meet the specification in chapter

Technical data

.

If the drive will be connected to an IT (ungrounded) supply network: Optional EMC filters of type +E200 and +E202 have been disconnected. Consult ABB for the instructions.

If the drive has been stored over one year: The electrolytic DC capacitors in the DC link of the drive have been reformed. See page

146

There is an adequately sized protective earth (ground) conductor between the drive and the switchboard.

128 Installation checklist

Check that …

There is an adequately sized protective earth (ground) conductor between the motor and the drive.

All protective earth (ground) conductors have been connected to the appropriate terminals and the terminals have been tightened (pull conductors to check).

The supply voltage matches the nominal input voltage of the drive. Check the type designation label.

The input power cable has been connected to appropriate terminals, the phase order is right, and the terminals have been tightened (pull conductors to check).

Appropriate supply fuses and disconnector have been installed.

The motor cable has been connected to appropriate terminals, the phase order is right, and the terminals have been tightened (pull conductors to check).

The brake resistor cable (if present) has been connected to appropriate terminals, and the terminals have been tightened (pull conductors to check).

The motor cable (and brake resistor cable, if present) has been routed away from other cables.

No power factor compensation capacitors have been connected to the motor cable.

The control cables (if any) have been connected to the control unit.

If a drive bypass connection will be used: The direct-on-line contactor of the motor and the drive output contactor are either mechanically or electrically interlocked (cannot be closed simultaneously).

There are no tools, foreign objects or dust from drilling inside the drive.

Drive and motor connection box covers are in place.

The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start-up.

8

Start-up 129

Start-up

What this chapter contains

This chapter describes the start-up procedure of the drive.

Startup procedure

1. Run setup of the drive control program according to the start-up instructions given in Quick start-up guide for ACS880 primary control program or in the firmware manual.

•

For drives with resistor braking (option +D151): see also section Start-up on page 253

.

• For drives with ABB sine filter, check that parameter 95.15 Special HW settings is set to ABB sine filter . For other sine filters, see Sine filter hardware manual (3AXD50000016814 [English]).

• For drives with ABB motors in explosive atmospheres, see also ACS880 drives with ABB motors in explosive atmospheres (3AXD50000019585

[English]).

2. Validate the Safe torque off function according to the instructions given in chapter

Safe Torque off function

on page

235 .

3. Validate the safety functions (option +Q973 or +Q972) as described in FSO-12 safety functions module user’s manual (3AXD50000015612 [English]) or in FSO-

21 safety functions module user’s manual (3AXD50000015614 [English]).

130 Start-up

Fault tracing 131

9

Fault tracing

What this chapter contains

This chapter describes the fault tracing possibilities of the drive.

LEDs

Where

Control panel mounting platform

LED

POWER

FAULT

Color

Green

Red

When the LED is lit

Control unit is powered and +15 V is supplied to the control panel.

Drive in fault state.

Warning and fault messages

See the firmware manual for the descriptions, causes and remedies of the drive control program warning and fault messages.

132 Fault tracing

Maintenance 133

10

Maintenance

What this chapter contains

This chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions.

Maintenance intervals

The table below shows the maintenance tasks which can be done by the end user.

The complete maintenance schedule is available on the Internet

( www.abb.com/drivesservices ). For more information, consult your local ABB Service representative ( www.abb.com/searchchannels ).

The maintenance and component replacement intervals are based on the assumption that the equipment is operated within the specified ratings and ambient conditions. ABB recommends annual drive inspections to ensure the highest reliability and optimum performance.

Note: Long term operation near the specified maximum ratings or ambient conditions may require shorter maintenance intervals for certain components. Consult your local

ABB Service representative for additional maintenance recommendations.

134 Maintenance



Descriptions of symbols

Action Description

I Visual inspection and maintenance action if needed

P

R

Performance of on/off-site work (commissioning, tests, measurements or other work)

Replacement of component



Recommended annual maintenance actions by the user

ABB recommends these annual inspections to ensure the highest reliability and optimum performance.

Action Target

P Quality of supply voltage

I

P

Spare parts

DC circuit capacitor reforming, spare modules and spare capacitors

I

I

I

Tightness of terminals

Dustiness, corrosion or temperature

Heat sink cleaning



Recommended maintenance intervals after start-up

Component Years from start-up

3 6 9 12 15 18 20 21

Cooling

Main cooling fan (frames R1 to R9)

Auxiliary cooling fan for circuit boards (frames

R1 to R9)

Auxiliary cooling fan IP55 (frames R8 and R9)

Aging

Battery for control panel and ZCU control unit

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

4FPS10000239703

Heatsink

The module heatsink fins pick up dust from the cooling air. The drive runs into overtemperature warnings and faults if the heatsink is not clean. When necessary, clean the heatsink as follows.

WARNING! Obey the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

Maintenance 135

WARNING!

Use a vacuum cleaner with antistatic hose and nozzle. Using a normal vacuum cleaner creates static discharges which can damage circuit boards.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Remove the cooling fan(s). See section

Fans below.

3. Blow clean compressed air (not humid or oily) from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust. Note: If there is a risk of dust entering adjoining equipment, perform the cleaning in another room.

4. Refit the cooling fan.

Fans

The lifespan of the cooling fans of the drive depend on the running time of the fan, ambient temperature and dust concentration. See the firmware manual for the actual signal which indicates the running time of the cooling fan.

Reset the running time signal after a fan replacement. Also, reset the maintenance counter, if used.

Replacement fans are available from ABB. Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts.

136 Maintenance



Replacing the main cooling fan of frames R1 to R3

WARNING! Obey the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Release the retaining clip by pushing with a flat screwdriver and turning to the right.

3. Lift the fan assembly up.

4. Install the new fan assembly in reverse order. Make sure that the fan blows upwards.

5. Reset the counter (if used) in group 5 in the primary control program.

3

2

Maintenance 137



Replacing the auxiliary cooling fan of IP55 frames R1 to R3

WARNING! Obey the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Remove the front cover by undoing the mounting screws at the sides.

3. Unplug the fan power supply wires.

4. Lift the fan off.

5. Install the new fan in reverse order. Make sure that the arrow (a) on the fan points down. Note : Bundle the wires under the clip (b) otherwise the cover will not fit properly.

3

5b

5a

138 Maintenance



Replacing the main cooling fan of frames R4 and R5

WARNING! Obey the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Lift the fan mounting plate up from the front edge.

3. Unplug the power supply wires.

4. Lift the fan assembly off.

5. Install the new fan assembly in reverse order. Make sure that the fan blows upwards.

6. Reset the counter (if used) in group 5 in the primary control program.

2

3

4

Maintenance 139



Replacing the auxiliary cooling fan of frames R4 and R5 (IP55 and option +C135) and IP21 frame R5 types ACS880-01-xxxx-7

WARNING! Obey the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Remove the front cover. See page

100

.

3. Unplug the fan power supply wires.

4. Lift the fan up.

5. Install the new fan in reverse order. Make sure that the arrow in the fan points to the direction marked on the drive frame.

4

5

3

140 Maintenance



Replacing the main cooling fan of frames R6 to R8

WARNING! Obey the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Undo the mounting screws of the fan mounting plate (view from bottom below).

3. Pull the fan mounting plate down from the side edge.

4. Unplug the power supply wires.

5. Lift the fan mounting plate off.

6. Remove the fan from the mounting plate.

7. Install the new fan in reverse order. Make sure that the fan blows upwards.

8. Reset the counter (if used) in group 5 in the primary control program.

2

3

2

6

Maintenance 141



Replacing the auxiliary cooling fan of frames R6 to R9

WARNING! Obey the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Remove the lower front cover (see page 103 ).

3. Unplug the control panel power supply wires from the control unit terminal X13 and the auxiliary cooling fan power supply wires from the terminal X208:FAN2.

4. Remove the upper front cover.

5. Release the retaining clips.

6. Lift the fan up.

7. Install the new fan in reverse order. Make sure that the arrow on the fan points up.

4

3

5

6

142 Maintenance



Replacing the IP55 auxiliary cooling fan of frames R8 and R9

WARNING! Obey the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Remove the IP55 front cover.

3. Remove the lower front cover from the IP55 cover.

4. Unplug the fan power supply wires.

5. Remove the fan.

6. Install the new fan in reverse order. Make sure that the arrow on the fan points up.

7. Reset the counter (if used) in group 5 in the primary control program.

3

3

5

4

Maintenance 143

144 Maintenance



Replacing the main cooling fans of frame R9

WARNING! Obey the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Undo the two mounting screws of the fan mounting plate (view from drive bottom below).

3. Turn the mounting plate downwards.

4. Disconnect the fan power supply wires.

5. Remove the fan mounting plate.

6. Remove the fan by undoing the two mounting screws.

7. Install the new fan in reverse order. Make sure that the fan blows upwards.

8. Reset the counter (if used) in group 5 in the primary control program.

2 2

6

3

4

Maintenance 145

Replacing the drive (IP21, UL Type 1, frames R1 to R9)

This section gives instructions for replacing the drive module without the cable entry box. This allows you to leave the cables installed (except from disconnecting the conductors).

Note for IP55 (UL Type 12) drives: It is not allowed to remove the cable entry box.

WARNING! Obey the safety instructions, page

14

. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment.

1. Disconnect the drive from the power line. Lock the main disconnecting device and ensure by measuring that there is no voltage.

2. Remove the front covers. See section Connection procedure for frames R1 to R3 on page 95

or Connection procedure for frames R4 and R5 on page 98

.

3. For frames R6 to R9: Remove the side plates of the cable entry box by loosening the mounting screws.

4. Disconnect the power and control cables.

5. Undo the screw(s) that fasten the drive module to the cable entry box.

6. Undo the two screws or bolts that fasten the drive module to the wall from top.

7. Undo the two screws or bolts which attach the drive module and cable entry box to the wall. Leave the lower wall mounting screws of the cable box in place.

8. Lift the drive off.

9. Install the new drive module in reverse order.

146 Maintenance

R1…R3 R4, R5

6

6

4

6

4

5

3

4

5

Capacitors

The drive intermediate DC circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors. Their lifespan depends on the operating time of the drive, loading and ambient temperature. Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature.

In frames R1 to R3, the capacitors are integrated to the ZINT board and in frames R4 to R5 to the ZMAC board. In frames R6 to R8, the capacitors are separate.

Maintenance 147

Capacitor failure is usually followed by damage to the unit and an input cable fuse failure, or a fault trip. Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected. Replacements are available from ABB. Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts.



Reforming the capacitors

Reform the capacitors if the drive has not been powered for three years or more. The reforming is done by powering the unit not loaded for 60 minutes. See page

34

for information on finding out the manufacturing date. For information on reforming the capacitors, see Converter module capacitor reforming instructions (3BFE64059629

[English]).

Memory unit

When a drive is replaced, the parameter settings can be retained by transferring the memory unit from the defective drive to the new drive. The memory unit is located on

the control unit, see page 33

.

WARNING!

Do not remove or insert a memory unit when the drive is powered or the control unit is powered from an external power source.

After power-up, the drive will scan the memory unit. If different parameter settings are detected, they are copied to the drive. This may take several minutes.



Replacing the memory unit

Pull the clip at the back of the memory unit up and take the unit off. Replace the unit in reverse order.

1

2

148 Maintenance

Replacing the control panel battery

The battery is housed on the rear of the control panel. Replace with a new CR 2032 battery. Dispose the old battery according to local disposal rules or applicable laws.

Replacing the control unit battery

For instructions how to replace the control unit battery, contact ABB service center.

Replacing safety functions modules (FSO-12, option +Q973 and FSO-21, option +Q972)

Do not repair safety functions modules. Replace a faulty module with a new one as described under

Installation of safety functions modules

on page

123

.

Technical data 149

11

Technical data

What this chapter contains

This chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive, for example, the ratings, sizes and technical requirements, provisions for fulfilling the requirements for

CE and other markings.

Marine type-approved drives (option +C132)

See ACS880-01/04+C132 marine type-approved drives supplement

(3AXD50000010521 [English]) for the ratings, marine-specific data and reference to valid marine type approvals.

Drives for SynRM motors

See ACS880-01 +N7502 drives for SynRM motors supplement (3AXD50000029482

[English]) for the ratings, fuses and other technical data.

150 Technical data

Ratings

The nominal ratings for the drives with 50 Hz and 60 Hz supply are given below. The symbols are described below the table.

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

Frame size

Input rating

I

1

A

I max

A

IEC RATINGS

Output ratings

Nominal use

I

2

A

P

N kW

S

N kVA

Light-overload use

I

Ld

A

P

Ld kW

Heavy-duty use

I

Hd

A

P

Hd kW

03A3-3

04A0-3

05A6-3

07A2-3

09A4-3

12A6-3

017A-3

025A-3

032A-3

038A-3

045A-3

061A-3

072A-3

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

046A-2

061A-2

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

274A-2

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3

R6

R7

R7

R8

R4

R5

R5

R6

R2

R2

R3

R4

R1

R1

R1

R1

R2

R3

R3

R4

R4

R5

R1

R1

R1

R2

R1

R1

R1

R1

25

32

38

45

61

72

2.4

3.3

4.0

5.6

8.0

10.0

12.9

17

145

170

206

274

61

75

87

115

4.6

6.6

7.5

10.6

16.8

24.3

31.0

46

29

42

54

64

76

104

3.1

4.1

5.6

6.8

2.4

3.3

4.0

5.6

9.5

8.0

12.2

10.0

16.0

12.9

21 17

25

32

38

45

61

72

178

247

287

362

76

104

122

148

6.3

7.8

4.6

6.6

11.2

7.5

12.8

10.6

18.0

16.8

28.6

24.3

41

64

31

46

145

170

206

274

61

75

87

115

17

25

32

38

45

61

5.6

8.0

10.0

12.6

1.8

2.4

3.3

4.0

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

3.0

4.0

5.5

7.5

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

24

30

36

43

58

68

7.6

9.5

12.0

16

2.3

3.1

3.8

5.3

17

22

26

31

42

50

5.5

6.9

8.9

12

1.7

2.3

2.8

3.9

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

3.0

4.0

5.5

7.5

37

45

55

75

15

18.5

22

30

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

11

138

162

196

260

58

71

83

109

4.4

6.3

7.1

10.1

16.0

23.1

29.3

44

58

68

82

109

24

30

35

46

7

10

12

18

1.8

2.6

3.0

4.2

105

145

169

213

45

61

72

87

10.6

16.8

24.3

38

3.7

4.6

6.6

7.5

37

45

55

75

15

18.5

22

30

4.0

5.5

7.5

11

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

11.0

15

18.5

22.0

30.0

37

45

55

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

0.55

0.75

1.1

1.5

7.5

11

15.0

18.5

22

30

2.2

3.0

4.0

5.5

0.55

0.75

1.1

1.5

Technical data 151

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

087A-3

105A-3

145A-3

169A-3

206A-3

246A-3

293A-3

363A-3

Frame size

R5

R6

R6

R7

R7

R8

R8

R9

Input rating

I

1

A

87

105

145

169

206

246

293

363

I max

A

122

148

178

247

287

350

418

498

IEC RATINGS

Output ratings

Nominal use

I

2

A

87

105

145

169

206

246

293

363

P

N kW

45

55

75

90

110

132

160

200

S

N kVA

60

73

100

117

143

170

203

251

430A-3 R9 430 545 430 250 298

1) At 25 °C (77 °F) ambient temperature the current is 451 A.

U

N

= 400 V

02A1-5

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

361A-5

414A-5

R1

R1

R1

R1

R1

R1

R1

R2

R2

R3

R3

R4

R4

R5

R5

R6

R6

R7

R7

R8

R8

R9

R9

2.1

3.0

3.4

4.8

5.2

7.6

11.0

14

21

27

34

40

52

65

77

96

124

156

180

240

260

361

414

3.1

4.1

5.6

6.8

9.5

12.2

16.0

21

29

42

54

64

76

104

122

148

178

247

287

350

418

542

542

2.1

3.0

3.4

4.8

5.2

7.6

11.0

14

21

27

34

40

52

65

77

96

124

156

180

240

260

361

414

0.75

1.1

1.1

1.5

2.2

3.0

4.0

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110

132

200

200

1.8

2.6

2.9

4.2

4.5

6.6

9.5

12

18

23

29

35

45

56

67

83

107

135

156

208

225

313

359

Light-overload use

I

Ld

A

P

Ld kW

83

100

138

161

196

234

278

345

400

2.0

2.8

3.2

4.6

5.0

7.2

10.4

13

19

26

32

38

49

62

73

91

118

148

171

228

247

343

393

45

55

75

90

110

132

160

200

200

0.55

1.1

1.1

1.5

2.2

3.0

4.0

5.5

7.5

11

15.0

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110

132

160

Heavy-duty

I

Hd

A

72

87

105

145

169

206

246*

293

363**

1.7

2.1

3.0

3.4

4.8

5.2

7.6

11

14

21

27

34

40

52

65

77

96

124

156

180

240*

302 use

P

Hd kW

0.55

0.75

1.1

1.1

1.5

2.2

3.0

4.0

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

90

110

132

160

200

37

45

55

75

110

160

200 361 ** 200

152 Technical data

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

Frame size

Input rating

I

1

A

R4

R5

R5

R6

R2

R3

R3

R4

R1

R1

R1

R2

R1

R1

R1

R1

R6

R7

R7

R8

R8

R9

R9

096A-5

124A-5

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

361A-5

414A-5

014A-5

021A-5

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

07A6-5

11A0-5

52

65

77

96

21

27

34

40

5.2

7.6

11.0

14

2.1

3.0

3.4

4.8

124

156

180

240

260

361

414

I max

A

178

247

287

350

418

542

542

76

104

122

148

29

42

54

64

3.1

4.1

5.6

6.8

9.5

5.2

12.2

7.6

16.0

11.0

21 14

2.1

3.0

3.4

4.8

52

65

77

96

21

27

34

40

124

156

180

240

260

361

414

IEC RATINGS

Output ratings

Nominal use

I

2

A

P

N kW

S

N kVA

Light-overload use

I

Ld

A

P

Ld kW

Heavy-duty use

I

Hd

A

P

Hd kW

0.75

1.1

1.1

1.5

2.2

3.0

4.0

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110

132

200

200

1.8

2.6

2.9

4.2

4.5

6.6

9.5

12

18

23

29

35

45

56

67

83

107

135

156

208

225

313

359

2.0

2.8

3.2

4.6

5.0

7.2

10.4

13

19

26

32

38

49

62

73

91

118

148

171

228

247

343

393

22

30

37

45

7.5

11

15

18.5

2.2

3.0

4.0

5.5

0.55

1.1

1.1

1.5

55

75

90

110

96

124

156

180

132

160

240*

302

200 361**

40

52

65

77

14

21

27

34

4.8

5.2

7.6

11

1.7

2.1

3.0

3.4

18.5

22

30

37

5.5

7.5

11

15

1.5

2.2

3.0

4.0

0.55

0.75

1.1

1.1

45

55

75

90

110

160

200

Technical data 153

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

Frame size

Input rating

I

1

A

R5

R5

R5

R6

R5

R5

R5

R5

R3

R3

R5

R5

R3

R3

R3

R3

R6

R7

R7

R8

R8

R9

R9

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

210A-7

271A-7

09A8-7

14A2-7

018A-7

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

042A-7

049A-7

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7

09A9-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

027A-7

07A3-7

35

42

49

61

14.2

18

22

26

7.4

9.9

14.3

19

23

27

7.3

9.8

84

98

119

142

174

210

271

64

74

76

104

22

29

44

54

12.2

18

22

29

38

46

12.2

18

124

168

198

250

274

384

411

I max

A

IEC RATINGS

Output ratings

Nominal use

I

2

A

P

N kW

S

N kVA

Light-overload use

I

Ld

A

P

Ld kW

Heavy-duty use

I

Hd

A

P

Hd kW

7.4

9.9

14.3

19

23

27

7.3

9.8

14.2

18

22

26

35

42

49

61

84

98

119

142

174

210

271

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110

132

160

200

250

8.8

11.8

17

23

27

32

8.7

11.7

17

22

26

31

42

50

59

73

100

117

142

170

208

251

324

7.0

9.4

13.6

18

22

26

6.9

9.3

13.5

17

21

25

33

40

47

58

80

93

113

135

165

200

257

30

37

45

55

11

15

18.5

22

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

5.5

7.5

75

90

110

132

160

200

250

26

35

42

49

9.8

14.2

18

22

19

23

5.6

7.3

5.6

7.4

9.9

14.3

61

84

98

119

142

174

210

3AXD00000588487

22

30

37

45

7.5

11

15

18.5

15

18.5

4

5.5

4

5.5

7.5

11

55

75

90

110

132

160

200

154 Technical data

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

Frame size

Input rating

I

1

A

R6

R7

R7

R8

R4

R5

R5

R6

R2

R2

R3

R4

R1

R1

R1

R1

046A-2

061A-2

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

274A-2

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

138

162

196

260

58

71

83

109

4.4

6.3

7.1

10.1

16.0

23.1

29.3

44

Max. current

I max

A

178

247

287

362

76

104

122

148

6.3

7.8

11.2

12.8

18.0

28.6

41

64

NEMA RATINGS

Output ratings

Light-overload use App. power

S n kVA

I

Ld

A kW

P

Ld hp

1.8

2.6

3.0

4.2

7

10

12

18

24

30

35

46

58

68

82

109

4.4

6.3

7.1

10.1

16.0

23.1

29.3

44

58

71

83

109

138

162

196

260

37

45

55

75

15

18.5

22

30

4.0

5.5

7.5

11

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

50

60

75

100

20

25

30

40

5.0

7.5

10

15

1.0

1.5

2.0

3.0

I

Heavy-duty use

Hd

A

105

145

169

213

45

61

72

87

10.6

16.8

24.3

38

3.7

4.6

6.6

7.5

kW

P

Hd hp

11.0

15

18.5

22.0

30.0

37

45

55

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

0.55

0.75

0.75

1.0

1.1

1.5

1.5

2.0

3.0

5.0

7.5

10

40

50

60

75

15

20

25

30

Technical data 155

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

Frame size

Input rating

I

1

A

Max. current

I max

A

NEMA RATINGS

Output ratings

App. power

S n kVA

Light-overload use

I

Ld

A kW

U

N

= 460 V

02A1-5

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

302A-5

R1

R1

R1

R1

R1

R1

R1

R2

R2

R3

R3

R4

R4

R5

R5

R6

R6

R7

R7

R8

R8

R9

2.1

3.0

3.4

4.8

5.2

7.6

11

14

21

27

34

40

52

65

77

96

124

156

180

240

260

302

3.1

4.1

5.6

6.8

9.5

12.2

16.0

21

29

42

54

64

76

104

122

148

178

247

287

350

418

498

1.8

2.6

2.9

4.2

4.5

6.6

9.5

12

18

23

29

35

45

56

67

83

107

135

156

208

225

262

2.1

3.0

3.4

4.8

5.2

7.6

11

14

21

27

34

40

52

65

77

96

124

156

180

240

260

302

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

3.0

4.0

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110

132

132

200

361A-5

414A-5

R9

R9

361

414

542

542

313

359

361

393 2)

200

250

2) At 30 °C (86 °F) ambient temperature the current is 414 A.

P

Ld hp

1.0

1.5

2.0

3.0

3.0

5.0

7.5

10

15

20

25

30

40

50

60

75

100

125

150

200

200

250

300

350

I

Heavy-duty use

Hd

A kW

22

30

37

45

7.5

11

15

18.5

0.55

0.75

1.1

1.5

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

110

132

200

200

55

75

90

110

P

Hd hp

30

40

50

60

10

15

20.0

25

2.0

3.0

5.0

7.5

0.75

1.0

1.5

2.0

150

200

250

300

75

100

125

150

40

52

65

77

14

21

27

34

4.8

5.2

7.6

11

1.7

2.1

3.0

3.4

96

124

156

180

240*

260

302

361**

156 Technical data

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

Frame size

Input rating

I

1

A

09A8-7

14A2-7

018A-7

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

042A-7

049A-7

U

N

= 575 V

07A4-7

09A9-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

027A-7

07A3-7

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

(See

Note 3 below)

210A-7

271A-7

(See

Note 4 below)

R5

R5

R5

R6

R5

R5

R5

R5

R6

R7

R7

R8

R8

R3

R3

R5

R5

R3

R3

R3

R3

R9

R9

242

271

41

52

52

62

17

22

27

32

77

99

125

144

180

22

27

9

11

7.0

9.4

13.6

18

Max. current

I max

A

384

411

64

74

76

104

22

29

44

54

124

168

198

250

274

12.2

18

22

29

38

46

12.2

18

NEMA RATINGS

Output ratings

Light-overload use App. power

S n kVA

I

Ld

A kW

P

Ld hp

8.8

11.8

17

23

27

32

8.7

11.7

17

22

26

31

42

50

59

73

100

117

142

170

208

251

324

7.0

9.4

13.6

18

22

27

9

11

17

22

27

32

41

52

52

62

77

99

125

144

180

242

271

160

200

250

250

30

37

37

45

11

15

18.5

22

55

75

90

110

132

15

18.5

5.5

7.5

4.0

5.5

7.5

11

40

50

50

60

15

20

25

30

75

100

125

150

200

20

25

7.5

10

5.0

7.5

10

15

I

Heavy-duty use

Hd

A

32

41

41

52

11

17

22

27

62

77

99

125

144

5.6

7.4

9.9

14.3

19

23

6.1

9

192

242* kW

22

30

30

37

7.5

11

15

18.5

45

55

75

90

110

11

15

4.0

5.5

3.0

4.0

5.5

7.5

132

160

P

Hd hp

30

40

40

50

10

15

20

25

60

75

100

125

150

15

20

5.0

7.5

3.0

5.0

7.5

10

200

250

3AXD00000588487



Definitions

U

N

I

1

I

2

P

N

Nominal voltage of the drive

Nominal rms input current

Nominal output current (available continuously with no over-loading)

Typical motor power in no-overload use

Technical data 157

I

I

I

Ld

P

Ld max

Hd

Continuous rms output current allowing 10% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes

Typical motor power in light-overload use

Maximum output current. Available for 10 seconds at start. then as long as allowed by drive temperature.

Continuous rms output current allowing 50% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes.

* Continuous rms output current allowing 30% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes.

** Continuous rms output current allowing 25% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes.

*** Continuous rms output current allowing 35% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes in IEC ratings.

**** Continuous rms output current allowing 35% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes in NEMA ratings.

P

Hd

Typical motor power in heavy-duty use

Note 1: The ratings apply at an ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F).

Note 2: To achieve the rated motor power given in the table, the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current.

The DriveSize dimensioning tool available from ABB is recommended for selecting the drive, motor and gear combination.

Note 3 – ACS880-01-174A-7 amp rating: The drive can deliver 192 A continuously with no overload.

Note 4 – ACS880-01-271A-7 power rating: The power rating is as per NEC Table 42.1.

However, the drive can be used for a typical 4-pole motor rated to 300 hp meeting NEMA MG 1

Table 12-11 minimum efficiency standard (EPAct efficiency electrical motors) if motor full load current is not more than 271 A.

158 Technical data

Derating



Ambient temperature derating

IP21 (UL Type 1) drive types and other IP55 (UL Type 12) types than listed in the following subheadings

In the temperature range +40…55 °C (+104…131 °F), the rated output current is derated by 1% for every added 1 °C (1.8 °F). The output current can be calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor ( k ): k

1.00

0.95

0.90

0.85

0.80

-15 °C

+5°F

…

+40 °C

+104 °F

+50 °C

+122 °F

+55 °C

+131 °F

T

IP55 (UL Type 12) drive types -274A-2, 293A-3, -260A-5, -302A-5 and -174A-7

In the temperature range +40…45 °C (+104…113 °F), the rated output current is derated by 1% for every added 1 °C (1.8 °F). In the temperature range +45…55 °C

(+113…131 °F), the rated output current is derated by 2.5% for every added 1 °C

(1.8 °F). The output current can be calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor ( k ): k

1.00

0.95

0.90

0.85

0.80

0.75

0.70

-15 °C

+5 °F

…

+40 °C

+104 °F

+45 °C

+113 °F

+50 °C

+122 °F

+55 °C

+131 °F

T

Technical data 159

IP55 (UL Type 12) drive type -240A-5

In the temperature range +40…50 °C (+104…122 °F), the rated output current is derated by 1% for every added 1 °C (1.8 °F). In the temperature range +50…55 °C

(+122…131 °F), the rated output current is derated by 2.5% for every added 1 °C

(1.8 °F). The output current can be calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor ( k ): k

1.00

0.95

0.90

0.85

0.80

0.75

-15 °C

+5 °F

…

+40 °C

+104 °F

+45 °C

+113 °F

+50 °C

+122 °F

+55 °C

+131 °F

T

160 Technical data

IP55 (UL Type 12) drive types -363A-3 and -361A-5

In the temperature range +40…45 °C (+104…113 °F), the rated output current is derated by 1% for every added 1 °C (1.8 °F). In the temperature range +45…50 °C

(+113…122 °F), the rated output current is derated by 2.5% for every added 1 °C

(1.8 °F). In the temperature range +50…55 °C (+122…131 °F), the rated output current is derated by 5% for every added 1 °C (1.8 °F).The output current can be calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor ( k ): k

1.00

0.95

0.90

0.85

0.80

0.75

0.70

0.65

0.60

0.55

-15 °C

+5 °F

…

+40 °C

+104 °F

+45 °C

+113 °F

+50 °C

+122 °F

+55 °C

+131 °F

T

Technical data 161

IP55 (UL Type 12) drive type -210A-7

In the temperature range +40…45 °C (+104…113 °F), the rated output current is derated by 3.5% for every added 1 °C (1.8 °F). The maximum temperature is 45 °C

(113 °F). The output current can be calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor ( k ): k

1.00

0.95

0.90

0.85

0.80

-15 °C

+5 °F

…

+40 °C

+104 °F

+45 °C

+113 °F

T

IP55 (UL Type 12) types -0430A-3, -0414A-5 and -0271A-7

The maximum ambient temperature is 35 °C (95 °F).



Altitude derating

At altitudes from 1000 to 4000 m (3300 to 13123 ft) above sea level, the derating is

1% for every 100 m (328 ft). If ambient temperature is below 40 °C (+104 °F), the derating can be reduced by 1.5% for every 1 °C (1.8 °F) reduction in temperature. A few altitude derating curves are shown below. For a more accurate derating, use the

DriveSize PC tool.

162 Technical data

Installation site altitude

4000 m

13123 ft

3500 m

11429 ft

3000 m

9842 ft

2500 m

8202 ft

2000 m

6562 ft

1500 m

4921 ft

1000 m

3300 ft

+20 °C

+68 °F

+25 °C

+77 °F

0.95

1.00

0.80

0.85

0.90

+30 °C

+86 °F

+35 °C

+95 °F

+40 °C

+104 °F

Ambient temperature

Derating factor 1.00

Derating factor 0.95

Derating factor 0.9

Derating factor 0.85

Derating factor 0.80

The altitude derating can be reduced if the temperature is below +40 °C, for example, if the temperature is 30 °C, the derating factor is 1 - 1.5% · 10 = 0.85. You can reduce the output current by 35% instead of 40% at 4000 meter above the see level.



Deratings for special settings in the drive control program

Enabling special settings in the drive control program can require output current derating.

Technical data 163

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

046A-2

061A-2

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

274A-2

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3

03A3-3

04A0-3

05A6-3

07A2-3

09A4-3

Ex motor, sine filter, low noise

Contact ABB for the deratings of these cases:

• drive is used with an ABB motor for explosive atmospheres (Ex) and EX motor in

Parameter 95.15 Special HW settings is enabled

• sine filter given in the selection table on page 265 is used and

ABB Sine filter in

Parameter 95.15 Special HW settings is enabled

• Low noise optimization is selected in Parameter 97.09 Switching freq mode .

Note: If Ex motors are used together with sine filters, EX motor in Parameter 95.15

Special HW settings is disabled and ABB Sine filter in Parameter 95.15 Special HW settings is enabled. Obey the instructions of the motor manufacturer.

Drive type

ACS880-01-

EX motor (ABB Ex motors)

Nominal use Light- duty use

Output ratings

Heavyduty use

ABB Sine filter

Nominal use Light- duty use

I

N

A

P

N kW

I

Ld

A

I

Hd

A

I

N

A

P

N kW

I

Ld

A

Heavyduty use

I

Hd

A

120

145

177

221

55

62

73

95

15.1

21.9

29.0

41

4.1

5.9

7.0

9.5

30

37

45

55

15

15

18.5

22

0.55

0.8

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

11.0

126

153

186

233

58

65

77

100

4.3

6.2

7.4

10.0

15.9

23.1

30.5

43.0

105

134

161

195

45

61

72

87

10.6

16.8

24.3

38

3.7

4.6

6.6

7.5

127

153

185

238

58

71

83

101

4.4

6.3

7.1

10.1

16.0

23.1

29.3

44

30

37

45

55

15

19

22

22

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

11.0

134

161

195

251

61

75

87

106

4.6

6.6

7.5

10.6

16.8

24.3

31

46

2.4

3.3

4.0

5.6

8.0

10.0

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

3.0

4.0

2.3

3.1

3.8

5.3

7.6

9.5

1.80

2.4

3.3

4.0

5.6

8.0

2.3

3.1

3.8

5.3

7.2

9.2

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

3.0

4.0

2.2

2.9

3.6

5.0

6.8

8.7

1.7

2.3

3.1

3.8

5.3

7.2

95

120

145

169

41

55

62

73

10.0

15.9

23.1

31

3.5

4.3

6.2

7.4

164 Technical data

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

12A6-3

017A-3

025A-3

032A-3

038A-3

045A-3

061A-3

072A-3

087A-3

105A-3

145A-3

169A-3

206A-3

246A-3

293A-3

363A-3

430A-3

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5

Drive type

ACS880-01-

52

65

77

88

115

21

27

34

40

5.2

7.6

11.0

14

2.1

3.0

3.4

4.8

30

37

45

45

55

11.0

15

18.5

22

3.0

4.0

5.5

7.5

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

134

160

195

225

269

325

385

61

72

87

97

25

32

38

45

EX motor (ABB Ex motors)

Nominal use Light- duty use

Output ratings

Heavyduty use

ABB Sine filter

Nominal use Light- duty use

I

N

A

12.9

17

P

N kW

5.5

8

I

Ld

A

12.0

16

I

Hd

A

10.0

12.6

I

N

A

12.1

16

P

N kW

5.5

7.5

I

Ld

A

11.5

15

11

15

19

22

30

37

45

45

24

30

36

43

58

68

83

92

17

25

32

38

45

61

72

87

24

31

37

43

58

64

77

91

11

15

18.5

22

30

30

37

45

55

61

73

86

23

29

35

41

55

75

90

110

132

160

200

127

152

185

214

256

309

366

97

134

160

195

225*

269

325**

126

152

186

209

249

296

352

55

75

90

110

132

160

160

120

144

177

199

237

281

334

64

77

91

126

31

36

43

58

Heavyduty use

I

Hd

A

9.2

12

16

23

152

186

209*

249

296**

49

62

73

84

109

19

26

32

38

5.0

7.2

10.4

13

2.0

2.8

3.2

4.6

40

52

65

77

88

14

21

27.0

34

4.8

5.2

7.6

11

1.7

2.1

3.0

3.4

44

52

61

82

104

19

25

31

34

4.8

7.0

10.2

13

1.9

2.8

3.1

4.4

22

30

37

45

55

7.5

11.0

15

18.5

2.2

3.0

4.0

5.5

0.55

0.75

1.1

1.5

42

49

58

78

99

18

24

29

32

4.6

6.7

9.7

12

1.8

2.7

2.9

4.2

34

44

52

61

82

13

19.0

25

31.0

4.4

4.8

7.0

10.2

1.5

1.9

2.8

3.1

Technical data 165

Drive type

ACS880-01-

U

N

I

N

P

N

I

Ld

018A-7

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

042A-7

049A-7

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

210A-7

271A-7

09A9-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

027A-7

07A3-7

09A8-7

14A2-7

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

361A-5

414A-5

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7

I

N

A

147

170

EX motor (ABB Ex motors)

Nominal use Light- duty use

Output ratings

Heavyduty use

ABB Sine filter

Nominal use Light- duty use

P

N kW

75

90

I

Ld

A

140

162

I

Hd

A

115

147

I

N

A

140

161

P

N kW

75

90

I

Ld

A

133

153

220

238

322

370

110

132

200

200

209

226

306

352

170

220*

270

322**

204

221

289

332

110

110

160

200

194

210

275

315

30

37

45

55

11

15

18.5

22

*

*

5.5

7.5

*

*

*

*

75

90

110

110

132

160

200

35

42

49

61

14.2

18

22

26

*

*

7.3

9.8

*

*

*

*

84

98

119

126

154

184

238

*

*

*

*

*

*

6.9

9.3

13.5

17

21

25

33

40

47

58

80

93

113

120

146

175

226

*

*

*

*

*

*

5.6

7.3

10

14

18.0

22

26

35

42

49

61

84

98

119

126

154

184

*

*

*

*

*

*

6.9

9.3

13.5

17

21

24

33

40

46

49

68

83

101

112

137

161

207

*

*

*

*

*

*

4.0

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

90

110

132

160

3AXD00000588487

Supply voltage range

Nominal output current (available continuously with no over-loading)

Typical motor power in no-overload use

Continuous rms output current allowing 10% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes

31

38

44

47

12.8

16

20

22.8

*

*

6.6

8.8

*

*

*

*

65

79

96

106

130

153

197

24

33

40

46

9.3

14

17

21

*

*

5.5

6.9

*

*

*

*

49

68

83

90

112

137

161

Heavyduty use

I

Hd

A

104

140

161

204*

242

289**

166 Technical data

I

Hd

Continuous rms output current allowing 50% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes.

* Continuous rms output current allowing 30% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes.

** Continuous rms output current allowing 25% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes.

P

Hd

*

Typical motor power in heavy-duty use

Contact ABB

Note 1: The ratings apply at an ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F).

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

046A-2

061A-2

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

274A-2

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3

03A3-3

04A0-3

05A6-3

07A2-3

09A4-3

12A6-3

017A-3

Drive type

ACS880-01-

Output ratings with selection Low noise optimization of parameter

97.09 Switching freq mode

Nominal use Light- duty use Heavy-duty use

I

N

A

I

Ld

A

I

Hd

A

118

146

178

216

56

56

67

94

4.1

5.9

6.7

9.5

15.0

22.0

30.0

41.0

6.5

8.5

11.3

15

2.2

3.0

3.6

5.0

3.9

5.6

6.4

9.0

14.3

20.9

28.5

39.0

53

53

64

89

112

139

169

205

2.1

2.9

3.4

4.8

6.2

8.1

10.7

14.3

1.7

2.2

3.0

3.6

5.0

6.5

8.5

11.3

94

118

146

178

41

47

56

67

3.3

4.1

5.9

6.7

9.5

15.0

22.0

30.0

Technical data 167

025A-3

032A-3

038A-3

045A-3

061A-3

072A-3

087A-3

105A-3

145A-3

169A-3

206A-3

246A-3

293A-3

363A-3

430A-3

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

Drive type

ACS880-01-

37

39

46

72

18.0

23.0

29

29

93

133

153

191

206

4.4

6.5

9.4

12.0

1.8

2.6

2.9

4.1

Output ratings with selection Low noise optimization of parameter

97.09 Switching freq mode

Nominal use Light- duty use Heavy-duty use

I

N

A

22

30

I

Ld

A

20.9

29

I

Hd

A

15.0

22

67

86

118

146

35

41

56

56

178

194

236

274

325

33

39

53

53

64

82

112

139

169

184

224

260

309

30

35

41

47

56

67

86

118

146

178

194*

236

274**

1.7

2.5

2.8

3.9

4.2

6.2

8.9

11.4

17.1

21.9

28

28

35

37

44

68

88

126

145

181

196

29

33

39

46

12.0

18.0

23

23

72

93

133

153

191*

4.1

4.4

6.5

9.4

1.4

1.8

2.6

2.9

168 Technical data

Drive type

ACS880-01-

U

N

I

N

P

N

I

Ld

Output ratings with selection Low noise optimization of parameter

97.09 Switching freq mode

Nominal use Light- duty use Heavy-duty use

I

N

A

258

296

I

Ld

A

245

281

I

Hd

A

206

258**

042A-7

049A-7

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

210A-7

271A-7

027A-7

07A3-7

09A8-7

14A2-7

018A-7

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

361A-5

414A-5

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7

09A9-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

33

40

46

49

13.5

17

21

24

*

*

6.9

9.3

*

*

*

*

68

83

101

101

122

138

178

*

*

*

*

*

*

6.6

8.8

12.8

16

20

22.8

31

38

44

47

65

79

96

96

116

131

169

24

33

40

46

9.3

14

17

21.0

*

*

5.5

6.9

*

*

*

*

49

68

83

84

101

122

138

3AXD00000588487

Supply voltage range

Nominal output current (available continuously with no over-loading)

Typical motor power in no-overload use

Continuous rms output current allowing 10% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes

Technical data 169

I

Hd

Continuous rms output current allowing 50% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes.

* Continuous rms output current allowing 30% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes.

** Continuous rms output current allowing 25% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes.

P

Hd

*

Typical motor power in heavy-duty use

Contact ABB

Note 1: The ratings apply at an ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F).

170 Technical data

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

046A-2

061A-2

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

274A-2

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3

03A3-3

04A0-3

05A6-3

07A2-3

09A4-3

High speed mode

Selection High speed mode of parameter 95.15 Special HW settings improves control performance at high output frequencies. We recommend it to be selected with output frequency of 120 Hz and above.

This table gives the drive ratings for the maximum output frequency when High speed mode in parameter 95.15 Special HW settings is enabled: With output frequencies smaller than this recommended maximum output frequency, the current derating is less than the values given in the table. Contact ABB for operation above the recommended maximum output frequency or for the output current derating with output frequencies above 120 Hz and below the maximum output frequency.

At the output frequency 120 Hz no derating.

Drive module type

ACS880-01f

Output ratings with selection High speed mode of parameter

95.15 Special HW settings max

Hz

Maximum output frequency

Nominal use Light-duty use

I

N

A

I

Ld

A

Heavy-duty use

I

Hd

A

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

106

135

165

189

56

56

67

84

15.0

22.0

30.0

41.0

4.1

5.9

6.7

9.5

2.2

3.0

3.6

5.0

6.5

8.5

101

128

157

180

53

53

64

80

14.3

20.9

28.5

39.0

3.9

5.6

6.4

9.0

2.1

2.9

3.4

4.8

6.2

8.1

1.7

2.2

3.0

3.6

5.0

6.5

84

106

135

165

41

47

56

67

9.5

15.0

22.0

30.0

3.3

4.1

5.9

6.7

Technical data 171

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

156A-5

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

12A6-3

017A-3

025A-3

032A-3

038A-3

045A-3

061A-3

072A-3

087A-3

105A-3

145A-3

169A-3

206A-3

246A-3

293A-3

363A-3

430A-3

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5

Drive module type

ACS880-01-

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500 f

Output ratings with selection High speed mode of parameter

95.15 Special HW settings max

Hz

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

Maximum output frequency

Nominal use Light-duty use

I

N

A

11.3

15

22

30

35

41

56

56

67

77

106

135

165

170

202

236

280

I

Ld

A

10.7

14.3

20.9

29

33

39

53

53

64

73

101

128

157

162

192

224

266

Heavy-duty use

I

Hd

A

8.5

11.3

15.0

22

30

35

41

47

56

67

77

106

135

143

170*

202

236**

1.8

2.6

2.9

4.1

4.4

6.5

9.4

12.0

18.0

23.0

29

29

37

39

46

58

74

122

1.7

2.5

2.8

3.9

4.2

6.2

8.9

11.4

17.1

21.9

28

28

35

37

44

55

70

116

29

33

39

46

12.0

18.0

23

23

58

74

4.1

4.4

6.5

9.4

1.4

1.8

2.6

2.9

172 Technical data

Drive module type

ACS880-01f f max

U

N

I

N

P

N

018A-7

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

042A-7

049A-7

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

210A-7

271A-7

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

361A-5

414A-5

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7

09A9-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

027A-7

07A3-7

09A8-7

14A2-7 f

Output ratings with selection High speed mode of parameter

95.15 Special HW settings max

Hz

500

500

500

500

500

Maximum output frequency

Nominal use Light-duty use

I

N

A

140

168

182

206

236

I

Ld

A

133

160

173

196

224

Heavy-duty use

I

Hd

A

122

140

168*

182

206**

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

*

*

*

*

*

*

6.6

8.8

12.8

16

20

23

32

38

44

44

53

68

83

83

96

101

130

*

*

*

*

*

*

6.3

8.4

12.2

15

19

22

30

36

42

42

50

65

79

79

91

96

124

3AXD00000588487

Output frequency

Maximum output frequency with High speed mode

Nominal voltage of the drive

Continuous rms output current. No overload capability at 40 °C (104 °F)

Typical motor power in no-overload use.

23

32

38

40

8.8

13

16

20

*

*

5.3

6.6

*

*

*

*

44

53

68

72

83

83

101

Technical data 173

I

Ld

I

Hd

*

Continuous rms output current allowing 10% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes

Continuous rms output current allowing 50% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes

* Continuous rms output current allowing 40% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes

** Continuous rms output current allowing 25% overload for 1 minute every 5 minutes

Contact ABB

Fuses (IEC)

gG and aR fuses for protection against short-circuit in the input power cable or drive are listed below. Either fuse type can be used for frames R1 to R9 if it operates rapidly enough. The operating time depends on the supply network impedance and the cross-sectional area and length of the supply cable.

For frames R7 to R9 ABB recommends ultra-rapid (aR) fuses, see section

Quick guide for selecting between gG and aR fuses

on page

180 .

Note 1: See also

Implementing thermal overload and short-circuit protection on page

78

.

Note 2: Fuses with higher current rating than the recommended ones must not be used. Fuses with lower current rating can be used.

Note 3: Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they meet the ratings and the melting curve of the fuse does not exceed the melting curve of the fuse mentioned in the table.



aR fuses (frames R1 to R9)

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

046A-2

061A-2

Min. shortcircuit current

1)

(A)

30

30

30

53

65

120

160

280

300

Ultrarapid (aR) fuses (one fuse per phase)

Input curren t

(A)

A A

2 s V

Fuse

Manufacturer

4.6

6.6

7.5

10.6

16.8

24.3

31.0

46

61

16

16

16

20

25

40

63

80

125

48

48

48

78

130

460

1450

2550

8500

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Type

170M1559

170M1559

170M1559

170M1560

170M1561

170M1563

170M1565

170M1566

170M1568

Type

IEC 60269

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

174 Technical data

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

274A-2

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3

Min. shortcircuit current 1)

(A)

380

500

700

1000

1280

1450

2050

03A3-3

04A0-3

05A6-3

07A2-3

65

65

65

65

09A4-3

12A6-3

017A-3

025A-3

65

65

65

120

032A-3

038A-3

045A-3

061A-3

120

170

170

280

072A-3

087A-3

105A-3

145A-3

380

480

480

1280

169A-3

206A-3

246A-3

293A-3

1280

1800

2210

3010

363A-3

430A-3

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5

4000

5550

7800

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

65

65

65

65

65

Ultrarapid (aR) fuses (one fuse per phase)

Input curren t

(A)

A A 2 s V

Fuse

Manufacturer

75

87

115

145

170

206

274

2.4

3.3

4.0

5.6

8.0

10.0

12.9

17

25

32

38

45

61

72

87

15000

28500

46500

46500

105000

155000

220000

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

105 315 46500 690

145

169

206

246

293

363

430

2.1

3.0

3.4

4.8

5.2

200

250

315

315

450

500

630

25

25

25

25

25

25

25

40

40

63

63

80

100

125

160 16000 690

315

450

500

630

800

25

25

25

25

25

130

130

130

130

130

130

130

460

460

1450

1450

2550

4650

8500

46500

105000

145000

275000

490000

1000 985000

130

130

130

130

130

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

1250 2150000 690

690

690

690

690

690

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Type

170M3815

170M3816

170M3817

170M3817

170M5809

170M5810

170M5810

Bussmann 170M1561

Bussmann 170M1561

Bussmann 170M1561

Bussmann 170M1561

Bussmann 170M1561

Bussmann 170M1561

Bussmann 170M1561

Bussmann 170M1563

Bussmann 170M1563

Bussmann 170M1565

Bussmann 170M1565

Bussmann 170M1566

Bussmann 170M1567

Bussmann 170M1568

Bussmann 170M1569

Bussmann 170M3817

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

170M3817

170M5809

170M5810

170M5812

170M6812D

170M6814D

170M8554D

170M1561

170M1561

170M1561

170M1561

170M1561

Type

IEC 60269

000

000

000

000

000

2

2

3

1

1

1

1

000

000

000

1

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

3

3

3

2

2

1

2

Technical data 175

027A-7

07A3-7

09A8-7

14A2-7

018A-7

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

361A-5

414A-5

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7

09A9-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

280

300

480

480

1000

1280

1610

2210

Min. shortcircuit current 1)

(A)

65

65

120

120

170

170

2620

4000

5550

7800

160

160

40

53

40

53

94

120

042A-7

049A-7

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

170

280

280

480

94

120

160

160

700

1610

Ultrarapid (aR) fuses (one fuse per phase)

Input curren t

(A)

A A 2 s V

Fuse

Manufacturer

7.6

11.0

14

21

27

34

40

52

65

77

96

Bussmann 170M1561

Bussmann 170M1561

Bussmann 170M1563

Bussmann 170M1563

Bussmann 170M1565

Bussmann 170M1565

Bussmann 170M1566

Bussmann 170M1567

Bussmann 170M1568

124 315 46500 690 Bussmann

156 400 74000 690 Bussmann

180 500 155000 690 Bussmann

240 550 190000 690

260 800 490000 690

361 1000 985000 690

414 1250 2150000 690

7.4

9.9

14.3

19

23

27

7.3

9.8

14.2

18

22

26

35

42

49

61

84

98

25

25

40

40

63

63

80

100

125

160 16000 690 Bussmann

250 28500 690 Bussmann

16

20

32

40

50

50

16

20

32

40

50

50

63

80

80

125

130

130

460

460

1450

1450

2550

4650

8500

48

78

270

460

770

770

48

78

270

460

770

770

1450

2550

2550

8500

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

Bussmann

Type

170M1569

170M3816

170M3817

170M5808

170M5810

170M5811

Bussmann 170M6812D

Bussmann 170M6814D

Bussmann 170M8554D

Bussmann 170M1559

Bussmann 170M1560

Bussmann 170M1562

Bussmann 170M1563

Bussmann 170M1564

Bussmann 170M1564

Bussmann 170M1559

Bussmann 170M1560

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

160 16000 690 Bussmann

400 74000 690 Bussmann

170M1562

170M1563

170M1564

170M1564

170M1565

170M1566

170M1566

170M1568

170M1569

170M3816

Type

IEC 60269

2

3

2

2

000

000

1

1

3

3

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

2

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

176 Technical data

Drive type

ACS880-

01-

Min. shortcircuit current 1)

(A)

1610

2210

Ultrarapid (aR) fuses (one fuse per phase)

Input curren t

(A)

A A 2 s V

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

210A-7

2210

3200

119

142

174

210

400

500

500

700

74000

145000

145000

320000

690

690

690

690

271A-7 3200 271 700 320000 690

1)

minimum short-circuit current of the installation

Fuse

Manufacturer

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Type

170M3816

170M5810

170M5810

170M6811D

170M6811D

Type

IEC 60269

2

2

2

3

3

Technical data 177



gG fuses (frames R1 to R9)

Check on the fuse time-current curve to ensure the operating time of the fuse is below 0.5 seconds. Obey the local regulations.

Drive type

ACS880-

01…

Min. shortcircuit current 1)

A

Input current gG fuses (one fuse per phase)

Fuse

A A A 2 s V Manufacturer Type IEC size

03A3-3

04A0-3

05A6-3

07A2-3

09A4-3

12A6-3

017A-3

025A-3

032A-3

038A-3

045A-3

061A-3

072A-3

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

046A-2

061A-2

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

274A-2

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3

250

350

400

500

800

1000

80

120

120

200

17

40

40

80

800

1000

1300

1700

2300

3300

5500

7000

200

350

400

500

40

80

120

120

25

32

38

45

61

72

2.4

3.3

4.0

5.6

8.0

10.0

12.9

17

145

170

206

274

61

75

87

115

4.6

6.6

7.5

10.6

16.8

24.3

31.0

46

25

40

50

63

6

10

16

16

110

360

740

740

2500

7700

500

500

16000 500

20100 500

500

500

500

500

80 37500 500

100 65000 500

125 100000 500

160 170000 500

200 300000 500

250 600000 500

315 710000 500

400 1100000 500

10

16

16

25

6

10

4

6

53

110

110

355

355

700

700

2500

32

40

50

63

4500

7700

15400

21300

500

500

500

500

80 37000 500

100 63600 500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

OFAF000H6

OFAF000H10

OFAF000H16

OFAF000H16

OFAF000H25

OFAF000H40

OFAF000H50

OFAF000H63

OFAF000H80 000

OFAF000H100 000

OFAF00H125

OFAF00H160

00

00

OFAF0H200

OFAF0H250

OFAF1H315

OFAF2H400

1

2

0

0

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

OFAF000H4

OFAF000H6

OFAF000H6

OFAF000H10

OFAF000H10

OFAF000H16

OFAF000H16

OFAF000H25

OFAF000H32

OFAF000H40

OFAF000H50

OFAF000H63

OFAF000H80 000

OFAF000H100 000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

178 Technical data

Drive type

ACS880-

01…

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

361A-5

414A-5

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7

09A9-7

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

087A-3

105A-3

145A-3

169A-3

206A-3

246A-3

293A-3

363A-3

430A-3

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5

1000

1300

1700

3300

5500

6400

7800

9400

10200

250

350

400

500

800

1000

1000

1300

80

120

120

200

17

40

40

80

1700

3300

5500

6400

7000

10200

10200

115

145

Min. shortcircuit current 1)

A

Input current gG fuses (one fuse per phase)

Fuse

A A A 2 s V Manufacturer

87

105

145

169

206

246

293

363

430

100

125

160

250

315

355

63600

103000

185000

600000

710000

920000

500

500

500

500

500

500

425 1300000 500

500 2000000 500

630 2800000 500

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

Type IEC size

OFAF000H100 000

OFAF00H125 00

OFAF00H160

OFAF0H250

OFAF1H315

OFAF1H355

00

0

1

1

OFAF2H425

OFAF2H500

OFAF3H630

2

2

3

2.1

3.0

3.4

4.8

5.2

7.6

11.0

14

21

27

34

40

52

65

77

96

124

156

180

240

260

361

414

7.4

9.9

4

6

6

10

10

16

16

25

32

40

50

63

80

100 63600 500

100 63600 500

125 103000 500

160

250

315

355

16

20

53

110

110

355

355

700

700

2500

4500

7700

15400 500

21300 500

37000 500

185000

600000

710000

920000

1200

2400

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

500

400 1100000 500

630 2800000 500

630 2800000 500

690

690

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

OFAA000GG16

OFAA000GG20

000

000

OFAF000H4

OFAF000H6

OFAF000H6

OFAF000H10

OFAF000H10

OFAF000H16

OFAF000H16

OFAF000H25

OFAF000H32

OFAF000H40

OFAF000H50

OFAF000H63

OFAF000H80 000

OFAF000H100 000

OFAF000H100 000

OFAF00H125 00

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

000

OFAF00H160

OFAF0H250

OFAF1H315

OFAF1H355

OFAF2H400

OFAF3H630

OFAF3H630

2

3

3

00

0

1

1

Technical data 179

Drive type

ACS880-

01…

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

042A-7

049A-7

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

027A-7

07A3-7

09A8-7

14A2-7

018A-7

Min. shortcircuit current 1)

A

Input current gG fuses (one fuse per phase)

Fuse

A A A 2 s V Manufacturer

190

280

450

450

115

145

190

280

450

450

520

800

800

1050

1700

1700

14.3

19

23

27

7.3

9.8

14.2

18

22

26

35

42

49

61

84

98

25

35

50

50

16

20

25

35

50

50

63

80

80

100

160

160

4000

12000

24000

24000

1200

2400

4000

12000

24000

24000

30000

51000

51000

95000

240000

240000

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

690

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

210A-7

2200

3200

5500

7000

119

142

174

210

200

250

315

350000

700000

850000

690

690

690

400 1300000 690

271A-7 7000 271 400 1300000 690

1)

minimum short-circuit current of the installation

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

ABB

Type IEC size

OFAA000GG25 000

OFAA000GG35 000

OFAA000GG50 000

OFAA000GG50 000

OFAA000GG16 000

OFAA000GG20 000

OFAA000GG25 000

OFAA000GG35 000

OFAA000GG50 000

OFAA000GG50 000

OFAA000GG63 000

OFAA0GG80 0

OFAA0GG80

OFAA0GG100

0

0

OFAA1GG160

OFAA1GG160

OFAA1GG200

OFAA1GG250

OFAA2GG315

OFAA3GG400

OFAA3GG400

2

3

3

1

1

1

1

180 Technical data



Quick guide for selecting between gG and aR fuses

The combinations (cable size, cable length, transformer size and fuse type) in this table fulfil the minimum requirements for the proper operation of the fuse. Use this table to select between gG and aR fuses or calculate the short-circuit current of the installation as described under

Calculating the short-circuit current of the installation

on page

183

).

Drive type

ACS880-

01…

Cable type Supply transformer minimum apparent power S

N

(kVA)

Copper Aluminum Maximum cable length with gG fuses mm

2 mm

2

10 m 50 m 100 m

Maximum cable length

10 m with aR fuses

100 m 200 m

03A3-3

04A0-3

05A6-3

07A2-3

09A4-3

12A6-3

017A-3

025A-3

032A-3

038A-3

045A-3

061A-3

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

046A-2

061A-2

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

274A-2

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3 3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×6

3×6

3×10

3×10

3×16

3×25

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×6

3×6

3×10

3×16

-

-

-

3×35

-

-

-

-

3×25

3×35

3×35

3×50

3×35

3×50

3×70

3×70

3×95

3×120

3×120

3×150

3×150 3×240

2×(3×95) 2×(3×120)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3×25

3×25

3.8

5.8

5.8

9.6

0.82

1.9

1.9

3.8

12

17

19

24

39

64

93

158

198

22

28

36

48

5.5

9.7

11

14

1.1

2.2

3.3

3.3

4.0

6.2

6.2

9.8

0.82

1.9

1.9

4.0

12

17

20

24

39

70

104

194

229

24

29

39

52

5.8

11

12

15

1.1

2.4

4.3

4.3

4.4

8.4

8.4

10

0.82

2.0

2.0

4.4

13

18

21

26

42

3.1

3.1

3.1

5.8

3.1

3.1

3.1

3.1

5.8

8.2

8.2

13

18

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3.4

3.4

3.4

5.9

3.4

3.4

3.4

3.4

5.9

8.3

8.3

14

19

30

39

45

62

8.6

11

15

21

1.8

3.5

4.6

8.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.8

28

36

40

57

8.3

11

14

19

1.8

3.3

4.4

7.7

1.1

1.1

1.1

1.5

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

5.0

5.0

5.0

6.2

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

6.2

8.7

8.7

15

20

Technical data 181

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

361A-5

414A-5

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7

09A9-7

072A-3

087A-3

105A-3

145A-3

169A-3

206A-3

246A-3

293A-3

363A-3

430A-3

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

Drive type

ACS880-

01…

Cable type Supply transformer minimum apparent power S

N

(kVA)

Copper Aluminum Maximum cable length mm 2 mm 2 with gG fuses

10 m 50 m 100 m

Maximum cable length with aR fuses

10 m 100 m 200 m

3×35

3×35

3×50

3×95

3×35

3×50

3×70

3×95

48

48

63

82

49

49

65

85

52

52

68

88

23

34

62

62

24

35

67

65

25

38

80

70

3×120

3×150

3×150

3×185

2×(3×70) 2×(3×95)

2×(3×95) 2×(3×120)

2×(3×120) 2×(3×185)

2×(3×150) 2×(3×240)

160

269

311

380

459

499

170

298

335

411

502

547

187

357

393

478

591

641

87

107

145

193

269

380

93

116

157

211

304

452

104

132

180

248

378

634

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×6

3×6

3×10

3×10

3×16

3×25

3×35

3×35

3×50

3×95

3×120

3×150

2×(3×70)

2×(3×70)

3×1.5

3×1.5

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3×35

3×35

3×50

3×70

3×70

3×120

3×150

3×240

2×(3×95)

2×(3×95)

2×(3×120) 2×(3×185)

2×(3×150) 2×(3×240)

-

-

1.0

2.4

2.4

4.8

4.8

7.2

7.2

12

15

21

24

30

48

60

60

78

103

200

335

388

425

621

621

9.5

12

1.0

2.4

2.4

4.9

4.9

7.5

7.5

12

15

21

24

30

49

61

61

80

105

209

362

410

452

669

666

9.5

12

1.0

2.4

2.4

5.2

5.2

8.9

8.9

12

16

22

25

31

51

63

63

83

108

224

411

456

512

763

747

9.5

12

3.9

3.9

3.9

3.9

3.9

3.9

3.9

7.2

7.2

10

10

17

18

29

42

60

77

97

133

158

242

336

473

3.3

4.4

3.3

4.4

3.3

4.4

18

29

43

63

7.3

10

10

17

4.1

4.1

4.1

7.3

4.1

4.1

4.1

4.1

80

102

143

165

262

368

539

19

30

46

67

7.6

11

11

18

5.0

5.0

5.0

7.6

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

85

109

156

179

307

427

674

182 Technical data

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

042A-7

049A-7

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

027A-7

07A3-7

09A8-7

14A2-7

018A-7

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

210A-7

271A-7

Drive type

ACS880-

01…

3×16

3×25

3×35

3×50

3×70

3×95

3×120

3×185

3×240

3×1.5

3×1.5

3×2.5

3×4

3×6

3×10

3×10

3×16

Cable type Supply transformer minimum apparent power S

N

(kVA)

Copper Aluminum Maximum cable length with gG fuses mm 2 mm 2 10 m 50 m 100 m

Maximum cable length

10 m with aR fuses

100 m 200 m

3×2.5

3×4

3×6

3×10

-

-

-

-

16

23

37

37

16

23

37

37

16

23

38

38

7.8

9.9

13

13

7.8

10

13

13

7.8

10

13

13

-

-

-

-

-

3×25

3×25

3×25

9.5

12

16

23

37

37

43

66

9.5

12

16

23

37

37

43

67

9.5

12

16

23

38

38

44

68

3.3

4.4

7.8

9.9

13

13

14

23

3.3

4.4

7.8

10

13

13

14

23

13

13

14

24

3.3

4.4

7.8

10

3×25

3×35

3×50

3×70

3×95

3×120

3×185

2×(3×95)

2×(3×120

183

267

452

584

584

66

87

141

141

187

275

476

608

605

67

88

141

143

192

286

515

654

640

68

90

149

146

134

184

184

266

266

23

40

58

134

138

192

192

277

275

23

40

59

138

145

205

205

295

289

24

41

61

145

Technical data 183



Calculating the short-circuit current of the installation

Check that the short-circuit current of the installation is at least the value given in the fuse table.

The short-circuit current ot the installation can be calculated as follows:

U

I k2-ph

=

2 · R c

2

+ ( Z k

+ X c

)

2 where

I k2-ph

= short-circuit current in symmetrical two-phase short-circuit

U = network line-to-line voltage (V)

R c

= cable resistance (ohm)

Z k

= z k

· U

N

2

/ S

N

= transformer impedance (ohm) z k

= transformer impedance (%)

U

N

= transformer rated voltage (V)

S

N

= nominal apparent power of the transformer (kVA)

X c

= cable reactance (ohm).

Calculation example

Drive:

• ACS880-01-145A-3

• supply voltage = 410 V

Transformer:

• rated power S

N

= 600 kVA

• rated voltage (drive supply voltage) U

N

= 430 V

• transformer impedance z k

= 7.2%.

Supply cable:

• length = 170 m

• resistance/length = 0.398 ohm/km

• reactance/length = 0.082 ohm/km.

184 Technical data

Z k

= z k

·

U

N

2

S

N

= 0.072

·

R c

= 170 m · 0.398

ohm km

(430 V)

2

600 kVA

= 22.19 mohm

= 67.66 mohm

X c

= 170

I k2-ph

= m · 0.082

ohm km

= 13.94 mohm

410 V

2 · (67.66 mohm)

2

+ (22.19 mohm + 13.94 mohm)

2

= 2.7 kA

The calculated short-circuit current 2.7 kA is higher than the minimum short-circuit current of the drive gG fuse type OFAF00H160 (1700 A). -> The 500 V gG fuse (ABB

Control OFAF00H160) can be used.

Fuses (UL)

UL class T fuses for branch circuit protection per NEC are listed below. Fast acting class T or faster fuses are recommended in the USA. Check on the fuse timecurrent curve to ensure the operating time of the fuse is below 0.5 seconds for units of frame sizes R1 to R6 and below 0.1 seconds for units of frame sizes R7 to R9. Obey local regulations.

Note 1: See also

Implementing thermal overload and short-circuit protection

on page

78 .

Note 2: Fuses with higher current rating than the recommended ones must not be used. Fuses with lower current rating can be used.

Note 3: Fuses from other manufacturers can be used if they meet the ratings and the melting curve of the fuse does not exceed the melting curve of the fuse mentioned in the table.

Input current

A

138

162

196

260

58

71

83

109

4.4

6.3

7.1

10.1

16.0

23.1

29.3

44

52

65

77

96

21

27

34

40

124

156

180

240

260

5.2

7.6

11

14

2.1

3.0

3.4

4.8

Drive type

ACS880-01…

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

046A-2

061A-2

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

274A-2

U

N

= 460 V

02A1-5

A

200

250

300

400

100

125

125

150

25

40

50

80

15

15

15

20

80

90

110

150

35

40

50

60

200

225

300

350

400

10

15

20

25

6

10

3

6

Technical data 185

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

V

Fuse (one fuse per phase)

Manufacturer Type

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

JJS-100

JJS-125

JJS-125

JJS-150

JJS-200

JJS-250

JJS-300

JJS-400

JJS-15

JJS-15

JJS-15

JJS-20

JJS-25

JJS-40

JJS-50

JJS-80

UL class

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

JJS-35

JJS-40

JJS-50

JJS-60

JJS-80

JJS-90

JJS-110

JJS-150

JJS-3

JJS-6

JJS-6

JJS-10

JJS-10

JJS-15

JJS-20

JJS-25

JJS-200

JJS-225

JJS-300

JJS-350

JJS-400

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

186 Technical data

Input current

A

302

361

414

41

52

52

62

17

22

27

32

22

27

9.0

11

7.0

9.4

13.6

18

77

99

125

144

180

242

271

Drive type

ACS880-01…

018A-7

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

042A-7

049A-7

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

210A-7

271A-7

302A-5

361A-5

414A-5

U

N

= 575 V

07A4-7

09A9-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

027A-7

07A3-7

09A8-7

14A2-7

60

80

80

110

30

40

50

50

50

50

15

20

15

20

30

40

150

150

200

250

300

400

400

A

400

500

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

600

Fuse (one fuse per phase)

V

600

600

600

Manufacturer

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Type

JJS-400

JJS-500

JJS-600

UL class

T

T

T

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

Bussmann

JJS-30

JJS-40

JJS-50

JJS-50

JJS-60

JJS-80

JJS-80

JJS-110

JJS-15

JJS-20

JJS-30

JJS-40

JJS-50

JJS-50

JJS-15

JJS-20

JJS-150

JJS-150

JJS-200

JJS-250

JJS-300

JJS-400

JJS-400

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

Technical data 187

Dimensions, weights and free space requirements

Frame

R5

R6

R7

R8

R1

R2

R3

R4

R9

Frame

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

R1

R2

R3

R4

525

576

730

726

H1 mm

450

450

880

963

955

475

576

730

726

H1 mm

409

409

880

963

955

-

-

-

-

H2 mm

-

-

-

-

-

420

490

596

569

H2 mm

370

370

600

681

680

251

284

300

380

IP55

W mm

162

155

172

203

203

IP21

W mm

155

252

284

300

380

161

180

203

203

261

274

274

357

D mm

226

249

365

386

413

327

344

344

421

D mm

292

315

423

452

477

Weight kg

7.0

8.4

10.8

18.6

22.8

42.2

H1 in.

H2 in.

UL type 1

W in.

D in.

16.11

14.57

6.10

8.89

16.11

14.57

6.10

9.80

18.71

16.54

6.77

10.28

22.70

19.30

7.99

10.80

28.74

23.46

7.99

10.79

28.60

22.40

9.92

14.09

53.0

68.0

95.0

34.70

23.60

11.22

14.37

37.90

26.82

11.81

15.21

37.59

26.77

14.96

16.27

UL type 12

Weight H1 * kg in.

8.1

9.5

17.72

17.72

H3 in.

-

-

W ** in.

6.38

6.38

D in.

11.50

12.40

12.0

19.1

23.4

42.9

20.70

22.70

28.73

28.60

54.0

74.0

34.66

37.90

102.0

37.59

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

7.09

12.87

7.99

13.54

7.99

13.54

9.92

16.46

11.18

16.65

11.81

17.78

14.96

18.78

Weight lb

15

19

24

41

50

93

117

150

209

Weight lb

18

21

26

42

52

95

119

163

225

D

*

H1 Height with cable entry box.

H2 Height without cable entry box (option +P940)

H3 Height with hood

W Width with cable entry box

**

Depth with cable entry box

Hood increases height with 155 mm (6.10 in) in frames R4 to R8 and with 230 mm

(9.06 in) in frame R9.

Hood increases width with 23 mm (0.91 in) in frames R4 and R5, 40 mm (1.57 in) in frames R6 and R7 and 50 mm (1.97 in) in frames R8 and R9.

Note 1: For more information on dimensions, see chapter

Dimension drawings .

Note 2: For dimensions and weights of option +P940 and +P944, see ACS880-01

+P940/+P944 drives for cabinet installation supplement (3AUA0000145446 [English]).

Note 3: For dimensions of option +C135, see Flange mounting kit installation supplement

(3AXD50000019100 [English]). For the additional weight of the flange mounting kit, see the table below.

188 Technical data

Frame Weight of flange mounting kit

(option +C135)

R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9 kg

2.9

3.1

4.5

4.7

4.7

4.5

5

6

7 lb

6

7

10

10

10

10

11

13

15



Free space requirements

200 mm (7.87 in.) free space is required at top of the drive.

300 mm (11.81 in.) free space (when measured from the drive base without the cable entry box) is required at bottom of the drive.

Technical data 189

Losses, cooling data and noise

Drive type

ACS880-01-

Frame Air flow m 3 /h ft 3 /min

032A-3

038A-3

045A-3

061A-3

072A-3

087A-3

105A-3

145A-3

03A3-3

04A0-3

05A6-3

07A2-3

09A4-3

12A6-3

017A-3

025A-3

169A-3

206A-3

246A-3

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

046A-2

061A-2

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

274A-2

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3

280

280

280

435

88

134

134

134

435

450

450

550

44

44

44

88

44

44

44

44

R4

R5

R5

R6

R2

R3

R3

R4

R6

R7

R7

R8

R1

R1

R1

R2

R1

R1

R1

R1

435

450

450

550

280

280

280

435

88

88

134

134

44

44

44

44

R6

R7

R7

R8

R4

R5

R5

R6

R2

R2

R3

R4

R1

R1

R1

R1

256

265

265

324

165

165

165

256

52

52

79

79

26

26

26

26

165

165

165

256

52

79

79

79

256

265

265

324

26

26

26

52

26

26

26

26

Heat dissipation

W

630

680

730

840

940

1260

1500

2100

232

337

457

500

73

94

122

172

337

457

562

667

907

1117

1120

1295

94

122

172

232

30

40

52

73

1440

1940

2310

3300

Noise dB(A)

62

62

62

67

51

57

57

62

67

67

67

65

46

46

46

51

46

46

46

46

67

67

67

65

62

62

62

67

51

51

57

62

46

46

46

46

190 Technical data

Drive type

ACS880-01-

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

09A9-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

027A-7

07A3-7

09A8-7

14A2-7

018A-7

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

302A-5

361A-5

414A-5

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7

293A-3

363A-3

430A-3

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

Frame

280

280

280

435

88

134

134

134

44

44

44

88

44

44

44

44

435

450

450

550

550

1150

1150

1150

134

134

280

280

134

134

134

134

280

280 m 3 /h

550

1150

1150

Air flow ft 3 /min

324

677

677

165

165

165

256

52

79

79

79

26

26

26

52

26

26

26

26

324

677

677

677

256

265

265

324

79

79

165

165

79

79

79

79

165

165

R8

R9

R9

R4

R5

R5

R6

R2

R3

R3

R4

R1

R1

R1

R2

R1

R1

R1

R1

R8

R9

R9

R9

R6

R7

R7

R8

R3

R3

R5

R5

R3

R3

R3

R3

R5

R5

Heat dissipation

W

3900

4800

6000

337

457

562

667

907

1117

1120

1295

94

122

172

232

30

40

52

73

1440

1940

2310

3300

3900

4200

4800

6000

329

405

217

284

114

143

207

274

399

490

62

62

62

67

51

57

57

62

46

46

46

51

46

46

46

46

65

68

68

68

67

67

67

65

57

57

62

62

57

57

57

57

62

62

Noise dB(A)

65

68

68

Technical data 191

Drive type

ACS880-01-

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

042A-7

049A-7

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

210A-7

271A-7

Frame

R5

R6

R6

R7

R5

R5

R5

R5

R7

R8

R8

R9

R9

435

450

450

550

550

1150

1150 m 3 /h

280

280

280

280

280

435

Air flow

256

265

265

324

324

677

677 ft 3 /min

165

165

165

165

165

256

Heat dissipation

W

578

660

864

998

1120

1295

1440

1940

2310

3300

3900

4200

4800

Noise



Cooling air flow and heat dissipation for flange mounting (option

+C135)

Drive type

ACS880-01-

Frame Air flow (option +C135)

Heatsink m 3 /h

Front m 3 /h

Heat dissipation (option

+C135)

Heatsink

W

Front

W

U

N

= 230 V

04A6-2

06A6-2

07A5-2

10A6-2

16A8-2

24A3-2

031A-2

046A-2

061A-2

075A-2

087A-2

115A-2

145A-2

170A-2

206A-2

274A-2

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3

R6

R7

R7

R8

R4

R5

R5

R6

R2

R2

R3

R4

R1

R1

R1

R1

R1

435

450

450

550

280

280

280

435

88

88

134

134

44

44

44

44

44

52

75

75

120

32

42

42

52

16

16

22

32

9

9

9

9

9

540

567

612

711

801

1089

1305

1845

195

290

393

423

57

76

101

146

18 12

139

171

195

255

90

113

118

129

37

47

64

77

16

18

21

26

65

68

68

67

67

67

65 dB(A)

62

62

62

62

62

67

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

169A-3

206A-3

246A-3

293A-3

363A-3

430A-3

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5

032A-3

038A-3

045A-3

061A-3

072A-3

087A-3

105A-3

145A-3

03A3-3

04A0-3

05A6-3

07A2-3

09A4-3

12A6-3

017A-3

025A-3

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

192 Technical data

Drive type

ACS880-01-

R2

R3

R3

R4

R4

R5

R5

R1

R1

R1

R2

R1

R1

R1

R1

R5

R5

R6

R6

R3

R3

R4

R4

R1

R1

R2

R2

R1

R1

R1

R1

R7

R7

R8

R8

R9

R9

Frame Air flow (option +C135)

134

280

280

280

88

88

134

134

Heatsink m 3 /h

44

44

44

44

44

44

435

435

450

450

550

550

1150

1150

32

32

42

42

16

16

22

22

9

9

9

9

Front m 3 /h

9

9

120

120

170

170

52

52

75

75

88

134

134

134

280

280

280

44

44

44

88

44

44

44

44

32

42

42

16

22

22

32

9

16

9

9

9

9

9

9

290

393

488

573

789

960

963

76

101

146

195

18

27

38

57

1701

2034

2925

3465

4275

5355

393

488

573

789

960

963

1121

1251

Heat dissipation (option

+C135)

Heatsink

W

Front

W

101

146

195

290

27

38

57

76

21

26

37

47

13

14

16

18

239

276

375

435

525

645

157

157

175

189

64

74

94

118

47

64

74

94

118

157

157

18

21

26

37

12

13

14

16

Drive type

ACS880-01-

018A-7

022A-7

026A-7

035A-7

042A-7

049A-7

061A-7

084A-7

098A-7

119A-7

142A-7

174A-7

210A-7

271A-7

09A9-7

14A3-7

019A-7

023A-7

027A-7

07A3-7

09A8-7

14A2-7

096A-5

124A-5

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

302A-5

361A-5

414A-5

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7

Technical data 193

R5

R5

R5

R6

R5

R5

R5

R5

R3

R3

R5

R5

R3

R3

R3

R3

R6

R7

R7

R8

R8

R9

R9

R8

R8

R9

R9

R9

R6

R6

R7

R7

Frame Air flow (option +C135)

Heatsink m 3 /h

435

435

450

450

550

550

1150

1150

1150

Front m 3 /h

52

52

75

75

120

120

170

170

170

280

280

280

435

280

280

280

280

134

134

280

280

134

134

134

134

435

450

450

550

550

1150

1150

42

42

42

52

42

42

42

42

22

22

42

42

22

22

22

22

52

75

75

120

120

170

170

314

396

475

549

733

854

963

1121

238

293

150

211

68

92

140

186

1251

1701

2034

2925

3465

3735

4275

Heat dissipation (option

+C135)

Heatsink

W

Front

W

1121

1251

1701

2034

2925

3465

3735

4275

5355

375

435

465

525

645

175

189

239

276

131

145

157

175

85

94

103

111

91

112

67

73

46

51

67

88

189

239

276

375

435

465

525

194 Technical data

Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables



IEC

Input, motor, resistor and DC cable terminal screw sizes, accepted wire sizes (per phase) and tightening torques ( T ) are given below. l denotes stripping length inside the terminal.

Frame Cable leadthroughs

Ø *

R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

2

2

2

2 pcs mm

2 17

2

2

17

21

24

32

45

54

4

4

45

54 mm

2

0.75…6

0.75…6

0.5…16

0.5…35

6…70

25…150

L1, L2, L3, T1/U, T2/V, T3/W

Wire size

95…240

(25…150**)

T (Wire screw) l T (Terminal nut)

M… N·m

Max. wire size mm M...

N·m mm

2

-

-

-

-

M8

M10

M10

0.6

0.6

1.7

3.3

15

30

40

(30**)

8

8

10

18

18

30

30

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Grounding terminals

T

25

25

25

25

35

185

185

N·m

1.8

1.8

1.8

2.9

2.9

9.8

9.8

2 × (50…150) M10

2 × (95…240) M12

40

70

30 M10 24 2×185 9.8

30 M10 24 2×185 9.8

Frame Cable leadthroughs

R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9 pcs

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

Ø * mm

17

17

21

24

32

35

43

45

54

Wire size mm

2

0.75…6

0.75…6

0.5…16

0.5…35

6…70

25…95

25…150

2 × (50…150)

2 × (95…240)

R-, R+/UDC+ and UDC- terminals

T (Wire screw)

M… N·m

-

-

-

-

M8

M8

M10

M10

M12

0.6

0.6

1.7

3.3

15

20

30

40

70 l mm

8

8

10

18

18

30

30

30

30

-

-

-

-

T (Terminal nut)

M… N·m

-

-

-

-

-

-

M8

M8

24

24

* maximum cable diameter accepted. For the lead-through plate hole diameters, see chapter

Dimension drawings

.

** 525…690 V drives

Note: When you use a cable size smaller than what is accepted by the terminal, remove the terminal and use suitable cable lugs for connecting the cable directly under the head of the bolt.

Technical data 195



US

Input, motor, resistor and DC cable terminal screw sizes, accepted wire sizes (per phase) and tightening torques ( T ) in US units are given below. l denotes stripping length inside the terminal.

R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

Frame Cable lead-

R8

R9 throughs

Ø *

L1, L2, L3, T1/U, T2/V, T3/W

Wire size T (Wire screw) l T

(Terminal nut)

Grounding terminals

Max. wire size pcs in.

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

4

0.67

0.67

0.83

0.94

1.26

1.77

2.13

kcmil/AWG

18…10

18…10

20…6

20…2

10…2/0

4…300 MCM

3/0…400 MCM

M…

-

-

-

-

M8 lbf·ft

0.44

0.44

1.25

2.4

11 in.

0.31

0.31

0.39

0.70

0.70

M…

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

AWG lbf·ft

4

4

4

4

2

1.3

1.3

1.3

2.1

2.1

350 MCM 7.2

(4…300 MCM)

M10 22.1

1.18

M10 29.5

(22.1**)

-

1.18

-

1.77 2 × (1/0…300 MCM) M10 29.5

1.18 M10 17.7

350 MCM 7.2

2×

350 MCM

7.2

4 2.13 2 × (3/0…400 MCM) M12 51.6

1.18 M10 17.7

2×

350 MCM

7.2

Frame Cable leadthroughs

R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

1

1

1

2

2

Ø * pcs in.

1

1

1

1

0.67

0..67

0.83

0.94

1.26

1.38

Wire size kcmil/AWG

18…10

18…10

20…6

20…2

10…2/0

4…3/0

R-, R+/UDC+ and UDC- terminals

T (Wire screw)

M…

-

-

-

-

M8

M8

1.69

4…300 MCM M10

1.77 2 × (1/0…300 MCM) M10

2.13 2 × (3/0…400 MCM) M12 lbf·ft

0.44

0.44

1.25

2.4

11

14.8

22,1

29.5

51.6

l mm

0.31

0.31

0.39

0.70

1.18

1.18

1.18

1.18

1.18

T (Terminal nut)

M… lbf·ft

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

M8

M8

-

-

-

-

-

17.7

17.7

* maximum cable diameter accepted. Cable connector inside diameter: 3/4” (frames R1 and R2), 1” (R3). For the lead-through plate hole diameters, see chapter

Dimension drawings .

** 525…690 V drives

196 Technical data

UL listed cable lugs and tools

Wire size kcmil/AWG

6

4

2

1

1/0

2/0

Compression lug

Manufacturer Type

Thomas &

Betts

E10731

54136

Burndy

Ilsco

Thomas &

Betts

YAV6C-L2

CCL-6-38

54140

Burndy

Ilsco

Thomas &

Betts

Burndy

Ilsco

Ilsco

Thomas &

Betts

Burndy

Ilsco

Ilsco

Thomas &

Betts

Burndy

Ilsco

Ilsco

Thomas &

Betts

Burndy

Ilsco

Ilsco

YA4C-L4BOX

CCL-4-38

54143TB

54142TB

YA2C-L4BOX

CRC-2

CCL-2-38

54148

YA1C-L4BOX

CRA-1-38

CCL-1-38

54109

YA25-L4BOX

CRB-0

CCL-1/0-38

54110

YAL26T38

CRA-2/0

CCL-2/0-38

Manufacturer

Crimping tool

Type No. of crimps

Thomas &

Betts

TBM4S

TBM45S

1

Burndy

Ilsco

Thomas &

Betts

MY29-3

ILC-10

TBM4S

1

2

1

Burndy

Ilsco

Thomas &

Betts

Burndy

Ilsco

Ilsco

Thomas &

Betts

Burndy

Ilsco

Ilsco

Thomas &

Betts

Burndy

Ilsco

Ilsco

Thomas &

Betts

Burndy

Ilsco

Ilsco

MY29-3

MT-25

TBM4S

TBM4S

MY29-3 2

IDT-12 1

MT-25

TBM-8

1

3

1

1

1

MY29-3

IDT-12 1

MT-25

TBM-8

MY29-3

1

3

2

IDT-12 1

MT-25

TBM-8

MY29-3

MT-25

2

1

3

2

IDT-12 1

1

Terminal data for the control cables

See Control unit (ZCU-12) connection data

below.

Technical data 197

Electrical power network specification

Voltage ( U

1

)

Network type

ACS880-01-xxxx-2 drives: 208 … 240 V AC 3-phase

+10%…-15%. This is indicated in the type designation label as typical input voltage level 3

~

230 V AC.

ACS880-01-xxxx-3 drives: 380 … 415 V AC 3-phase

+10%…-15%. This is indicated in the type designation label as typical input voltage level 3

~

400 V AC.

ACS880-01-xxxx-5 drives: 380 … 500 V AC 3-phase

+10%…-15%. This is indicated in the type designation label as typical input voltage levels 3

~

400/480/500

V AC.

ACS880-01-xxxx-7 drives: 525 … 690 V AC 3-phase

+10%…-15%. This is indicated in the type designation label as typical input voltage levels 3

~

525/600/690

V AC.

TN (grounded) and IT (ungrounded) systems.

However, 690 V drives must not be installed on cornergrounded TN systems or corner-grounded IT systems.

65 kA when protected by fuses given in the fuse tables Rated conditional short-circuit current (IEC 61439-1)

Short-circuit current protection

(UL 508C,

CSA C22.2 No. 14-05)

Frequency

Imbalance

Fundamental power factor

(cos phi

1

)

US and Canada: The drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA symmetrical amperes (rms) at 600 V maximum when protected by fuses given in the fuse table

50/60 Hz, variation ± 5%, maximum rate of change 17%/s

Max.

± 3% of nominal phase to phase input voltage

0.98 (at nominal load)

Motor connection data

Motor types

Voltage ( U

2

)

Frequency

Current

Switching frequency

Asynchronous AC induction motors, permanent magnet synchronous motors, AC induction servomotors and ABB synchronous reluctance motors (SynRM motors)

0 to U

1 point

, 3-phase symmetrical, U max

at the field weakening

0…500 Hz

For drives with du/dt filter: 120 Hz

For drives with sine filter: 120 Hz

See section

Ratings.

2.7 kHz (typically)

198 Technical data

Maximum recommended motor cable length

For ACS880-01-xxxx-2, ACS880-01-xxxx-3 and ACS880-

01-xxxx-5 frames R1 to R3 and for types ACS880-01-

07A3-7, ACS880-01-09A8-7, ACS880-01-14A2-7 and

ACS880-01-018A-7: 150 m (492 ft)

For ACS880-01-xxxx-2, ACS880-01-xxxx-3 and ACS880-

01-xxxx-5 frames R4 to R9 and for types from ACS880-01-

022A-7 to ACS880-01-271A-7: 300 m (984 ft).

Note: With motor cables longer than 150 m (492 ft) or switching frequencies higher than default, the EMC

Directive requirements may not be fulfilled.

Control unit (ZCU-12) connection data

Power supply

(XPOW)

Relay outputs RO1…RO3

(XRO1 … XRO3)

+24 V output

(XD24:2 and XD24:4)

Digital inputs DI1…DI6

(XDI:1 … XDI:6)

Start interlock input DIIL

(XD24:1)

24 V (±10%) DC, 2 A

Supplied from the power unit of the drive, or from an external power supply through connector XPOW (pitch

5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm 2 ).

Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm 2

250 V AC / 30 V DC, 2 A

Protected by varistors

Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm 2

Total load capacity of these outputs is 4.8 W (200 mA /

24 V) minus the power taken by DIO1 and DIO2.

Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm 2

24 V logic levels: “0” < 5 V, “1” > 15 V

R in

: 2.0 kohm

Input type: NPN/PNP (DI1…DI5), NPN (DI6)

Hardware filtering: 0.04 ms, digital filtering up to 8 ms

DI6 (XDI:6) can alternatively be used as an input for PTC sensors.

“0” > 4 kohm, “1” < 1.5 kohm

I max

: 15 mA (for DI6 5 mA)

Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm 2

24 V logic levels: “0” < 5 V, “1” > 15 V

R in

: 2.0 kohm

Input type: NPN/PNP

Hardware filtering: 0.04 ms, digital filtering up to 8 ms

Technical data 199

Digital inputs/outputs DIO1 and

DIO2 (XDIO:1 and XDIO:2)

Input/output mode selection by parameters.

DIO1 can be configured as a frequency input (0…16 kHz with hardware filtering of 4 microseconds) for 24 V level square wave signal (sinusoidal or other wave form cannot be used).

DIO2 can be configured as a 24 V level square wave frequency output. See the firmware manual , parameter group 11.

Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm 2

As inputs:

24 V logic levels: “0” < 5 V, “1” > 15 V

R in

: 2.0 kohm

Filtering: 0.25 ms

As outputs:

Total output current from +24VD is limited to 200 mA.

+24VD

DIOx

R

L

DIOGND

Reference voltage for analog inputs +VREF and -VREF

(XAI:1 and XAI:2)

Analog inputs AI1 and AI2

(XAI:4 … XAI:7).

Current/voltage input mode selection by jumpers. See page

112 .

Analog outputs AO1 and AO2

(XAO)

Drive to drive link

(XD2D)

Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm

2

10 V ±1% and –10 V ±1%, R load

1…10 kohm

Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm

2

Current input: –20…20 mA, R in

Voltage input: –10…10 V, R in

: 100 ohm

: > 200 kohm

Differential inputs, common mode range ±30 V

Sampling interval per channel: 0.25 ms

Hardware filtering: 0.25 ms, adjustable digital filtering up to

8 ms

Resolution: 11 bit + sign bit

Inaccuracy: 1% of full scale range

Inaccuracy for Pt100 sensors: 10 °C (50 °F)

Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm

2

0…20 mA, R load

< 500 ohm

Frequency range: 0…300 Hz

Resolution: 11 bit + sign bit

Inaccuracy: 2% of full scale range

Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm

2

Physical layer: RS-485

Termination by switch

200 Technical data

Safe torque off connection

(XSTO)

Connector pitch 5 mm, wire size 2.5 mm 2

Input voltage range: -3…30 V DC

Logic levels: “0” < 5 V, “1” > 17 V

Current consumption of frames R1 to R7: 30 mA

(24 V DC, continuous) per STO channel

Current consumption of frames R8 and R9: 12 mA

(24 V DC, continuous) per STO channel

Maximum output current from OUT1: 100 mA

(24 V DC, continuous)

For the drive to start, both connections must be closed

(OUT1 to IN1 and IN2).

EMC (immunity) according to IEC 61326-3-1

Control panel / PC connection Connector: RJ-45

Cable length < 3 m

The terminals on the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements. The

PELV requirements of a relay output are not fulfilled if a voltage higher than 48 V is connected to the relay output.

Technical data 201

Ground isolation diagram

+24VI

GND

XPOW

1

2

XAI

1 +VREF

-VREF

AGND

AI1+

AI1-

AI2+

AI2-

2

3

4

5

6

AO1

AGND

AO2

AGND

7

XAO

1

2

3

B

A

4

XD2D

1

2

BGND 3

XRO1, XRO2, XRO3

NC 11

COM

NO

NC

COM

NO

NC

COM

NO

12

13

21

22

23

31

32

DIIL

+24VD

DICOM

+24VD

DIOGND

33

XD24

3

4

1

2

DIO1

DIO2

DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI6

4

5

6

2

3

5

XDIO

1

2

XDI

1

OUT1

SGND

IN1

IN2

XSTO

1

2

3

4

Common mode voltage between channels +30 V

*

* Ground selector J6 settings:

.

All digital inputs share a common ground

(DICOM connected to

DIOGND). This is the default setting.

Ground of digital inputs

DI1…DI5 and DIIL

(DICOM) is isolated from

DIO signal ground

(DIOGND). Isolation voltage 50 V.

Ground

202 Technical data

Efficiency

Approximately 98% at nominal power level

Protection classes

Degree of protection

(IEC/EN 60529)

Enclosure types (UL508C)

IP21, IP55. Option +P940 and +P944: IP20

Overvoltage category

(IEC 60664-1)

Protective class (IEC/EN 61800-

5-1)

I

UL Type 1, UL Type 12. Option +P940: UL Open Type. For indoor use only.

III

Ambient conditions

Environmental limits for the drive are given below. The drive is to be used in a heated, indoor, controlled environment.

Operation

installed for stationary use

Storage in the protective package

Transportation in the protective package

Installation site altitude • 0 to 4000 m

(13123 ft) above sea level

1)

-

Air temperature

Relative humidity

• 0 to 2000 m

(6561 ft) above sea level 2)

Above 1000 m

[3281 ft]), see page

161

.

-15 to +55 °C (5 to

131 °F). 3)

-40 to +70 °C (-40 to +158 °F)

-40 to +70 °C (-40 to +158 °F)

No frost allowed.

See section

Ratings .

5 to 95% Max. 95% Max. 95%

No condensation allowed. Maximum allowed relative humidity is 60% in the presence of corrosive gases.

Technical data 203

Contamination levels

(IEC 60721-3-3, IEC 60721-3-2,

IEC 60721-3-1)

Atmospheric pressure

Vibration

Shock

(IEC 60068-2)

(IEC 60068-2-27)

Free fall

No conductive dust allowed.

Chemical gases:

Class 3C2. For circuit boards in

IP55 drives Class

3C3 and ANSI/ISA

S71.04-1985 GX

Solid particles:

Class 3S2

Chemical gases:

Class 1C2

Solid particles:

Class 1S3

70 to 106 kPa

0.7 to 1.05 atmospheres

Max. 1 mm

(0.04 in.)

(5 to 13.2 Hz), max. 7 m/s 2

(23 ft/s 2 )

(13.2 to 100 Hz) sinusoidal

Not allowed

Not allowed

70 to 106 kPa

0.7 to 1.05 atmospheres

Max. 1 mm

(0.04 in.)

(5 to 13.2 Hz), max. 7 m/s 2

(23 ft/s 2 )

(13.2 to 100 Hz) sinusoidal

Max. 100 m/s 2

(330 ft./s 2 ), 11 ms

100 mm (4 in.) for weight over 100 kg (220 lb)

Chemical gases:

Class 2C2

Solid particles:

Class 2S2

60 to 106 kPa

0.6 to 1.05 atmospheres

Max. 3.5 mm

(0.14 in.)

(2 to 9 Hz), max. 15 m/s 2

(49 ft/s 2 )

(9 to 200 Hz) sinusoidal

Max. 100 m/s 2

(330 ft./s 2 ), 11 ms

100 mm (4 in.) for weight over 100 kg (220 lb)

1. For neutral-grounded TN and TT systems and non-corner grounded IT systems

2. For corner-grounded TN, TT and IT systems

3. For IP55 (UL Type 12) type -210A-7: -15 to +45 °C (5 to 113 °F). For IP55 (UL Type 12) types -0430A-3, -0414A-5 and -0271A-7: -15 to +35 °C (5 to 95 °F).

Materials

Drive enclosure • PC/ABS 3 mm, color NCS 1502-Y (RAL 9002 / PMS 1C

Cool Grey) and RAL 9017

• PC+10%GF 3.0mm, Color RAL 9017 (in frames R1 to

R3 only)

• hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5 to 2.5 mm, thickness of coating 100 micrometers, color NCS 1502-Y

204 Technical data

Package

Disposal

Plywood and cardboard. Foam cushions PP-E, bands PP.

Frame

R6

R7

R8

R9

R1

R1 (IP55)

R2

R2 (IP55)

R3

R3 (+P940)

R3 IP55

R4 IP21

R4 (+P940)

R4 (IP55)

R5 IP21

R5 (+P940)

Length

(mm)

574

574

574

574

624

624

624

691

691

691

896

896

870

992

1145

1145

325

400

485

485

290

290

293

293

Package

Width

(mm)

256

256

256

256

256

256

256

290

Height

(mm)

281

364

304

386

316

316

399

329

580

568

655

655

329

415

329

329

The main parts of the drive can be recycled to preserve natural resources and energy. Product parts and materials should be dismantled and separated.

Generally all metals, such as steel, aluminum, copper and its alloys, and precious metals can be recycled as material. Plastics, rubber, cardboard and other packaging material can be used in energy recovery. Printed circuit boards and DC capacitors (C1-1 to C1-x) need selective treatment according to IEC 62635 guidelines. To aid recycling, plastic parts are marked with an appropriate identification code.

Contact your local ABB distributor for further information on environmental aspects and recycling instructions for professional recyclers. End of life treatment must follow international and local regulations.

Technical data 205

Applicable standards

The drive complies with the following standards. The compliance with the European Low

Voltage Directive is verified according to standard EN 61800-5-1.

EN 60204-1:2006 + A1 2009 Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines.

Part 1: General requirements . Provisions for compliance:

The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing

- emergency-stop device

- supply disconnecting device.

IEC/EN 60529:1991 + A1 2000

IEC 60664-1:2007

Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)

Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems. Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests.

EN 61800-3:2004

EN 61800-5-1:2007

EN 61800-5-2:2007

UL 508C:2002

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3:

EMC requirements and specific test methods

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 5-1:

Safety requirements – electrical, thermal and energy

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 5-2:

Safety requirements – Functional

UL Standard for Safety, Power Conversion Equipment, third edition

NEMA 250:2008

CSA C22.2 No. 14-10

GOST R 51321-1:2007

Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

Maximum)

Industrial control equipment

Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies. Part

1 - Requirements for type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies - General technical requirements and methods of tests

CE marking

A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the

European Low Voltage, EMC and RoHS Directives. The CE marking also verifies that the drive, in regard to its safety functions (such as Safe torque off), conforms with the

Machinery Directive as a safety component.



Compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive

The compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive has been verified according to standards EN 60204-1 and EN 61800-5-1.



Compliance with the European EMC Directive

The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard (EN 61800-

3:2004) covers requirements stated for drives. See section Compliance with the

EN 61800-3:2004 below.

206 Technical data



Compliance with the European RoHS Directive

The RoHS Directive defines the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.



Compliance with the European Machinery Directive

The drive is an electronic product which is covered by the European Low Voltage

Directive. However, the drive includes the Safe torque off function and can be equipped with other safety functions for machinery which, as safety components, are in the scope of the Machinery Directive. These functions of the drive comply with

European harmonized standards such as EN 61800-5-2. The declaration of conformity is shown below.

Declaration of Conformity

Technical data 207

208 Technical data

Technical data 209

Compliance with the EN 61800-3:2004



Definitions

EMC stands for E lectro m agnetic C ompatibility. It is the ability of electrical/electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment.

Likewise, the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality.

First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.

Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not supplying domestic premises.

Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and started up only by a professional when used in the first environment.

Note: A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing and/or starting up power drive systems, including their EMC aspects.

Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment.

Drive of category C4: drive of rated voltage equal to or above 1000 V, or rated current equal to or above 400 A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment.



Category C2

The drive complies with the standard with the following provisions:

1. The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E202.

2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the hardware manual.

3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual.

4. Maximum motor cable length is 150 meters.

WARNING!

The drive may cause radio interference if used in residential or domestic environment. The user is required to take measures to prevent interference, in association to the requirements for the CE compliance listed above, if necessary.

Note : Do not install a drive equipped with EMC filter +E202 on IT (ungrounded) systems. The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the

EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage to the unit.

210 Technical data



Category C3

The drive complies with the standard with the following provisions:

1. The drive is equipped with EMC filter +E200 or +E201.

2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the hardware manual.

3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual.

4. Maximum motor cable length is 150 meters.

WARNING!

A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network.



Category C4

If the provisions under

Category C3

cannot be met, the requirements of the standard can be met as follows:

1. It is ensured that no excessive emission is propagated to neighboring low-voltage networks. In some cases, the inherent suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient. If in doubt, the supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings can be used.

Medium voltage network

Supply transformer

Neighboring network

Static screen

Low voltage

Point of measurement

Equipment

(victim)

Equipment

Low voltage

Equipment

Drive

2. An EMC plan for preventing disturbances is drawn up for the installation. A template is available from the local ABB representative.

3. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in the hardware manual.

4. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in the hardware manual.

Technical data 211

WARNING!

A drive of category C4 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network.

UL marking

The drive is cULus Listed.



UL checklist

• The drive must be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification.

Cooling air must be clean, free from corrosive materials and electrically conductive dust. (IP55)- UL Type 12 enclosure. This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions.

• The maximum ambient air temperature is 40 °C (104 °F) at rated current. The current is derated for 40 to 55 °C (104 to 131 °F).

• The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than

100,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 600 V maximum. The ampere rating is based on tests done according to UL 508C.

• The cables located within the motor circuit must be rated for at least 75 °C

(167 °F) in UL-compliant installations.

• The input cable must be protected with fuses. Circuit breakers must not be used without fuses in the USA. Suitable IEC (class aR) fuses are listed on page

173

and UL (class T) fuses on page

184

. For suitable circuit breakers, contact your local ABB representative.

• For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any applicable local codes. To fulfill this requirement, use the UL classified fuses.

• For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes. To fulfill this requirement, use the UL classified fuses.

• The drive provides overload protection in accordance with the National Electrical

Code (NEC).

CSA marking

The drive modules are CSA marked.

China RoHS marking

The People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard (SJ/T 11364-2014) specifies the marking requirements for hazardous substances in electronic and electrical products. The green mark is attached to the drive to verify that it does not

212 Technical data contain toxic and hazardous substances or elements above the maximum concentration values, and that it is an environmentally-friendly product which can be recycled and reused.

RCM marking

RCM marking is required in Australia and New Zealand. An RCM mark is attached to the drive modules to verify compliance with the relevant standard (IEC 61800-

3:2004), mandated by the Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme.

For fulfilling the requirements of the standard, see section

Compliance with the

EN 61800-3:2004

on page

209 .

WEEE marking

The drive is marked with the wheelie bin symbol. It indicates that at the end of life the drive should enter the recycling system at an appropriate collection point and not placed in the normal waste stream. See section Disposal

on page 204 .

EAC marking

The drive has EAC certification. EAC marking is required in Russia, Belarus and

Kazakhstan.

Approvals

The drive is marine type approved. For more information, see ACS880-01/04 +C132 marine type-approved drives supplement (3AXD50000010521 [English]).

Cybersecurity disclaimer

This product is designed to be connected to and to communicate information and data via a network interface. It is Customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure connection between the product and Customer network or any other network (as the case may be). Customer shall establish and maintain any appropriate measures (such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti-virus programs, etc) to protect the product, the network, its system and the interface against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, any unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information.

Technical data 213

Disclaimer

The manufacturer shall have no obligation hereunder with respect to any product which (i) has been improperly repaired or altered; (ii) has been subjected to misuse, negligence or accident; (iii) has been used in a manner contrary to the Manufacturer's instructions; or (iv) has failed as a result of ordinary wear and tear.

214 Technical data

Dimension drawings 215

Dimension drawings

12

What this chapter contains

This chapter contains dimension drawings of the standard drive (IP21, UL Type 1) and drive with option +B056 (IP55, UL Type 12). For dimension drawings of options

+P940 and +P944 (IP20, UL Open Type), see ACS880-01 +P940/+P944 drives for cabinet installation supplement (3AUA0000145446 [English].

216 Dimension drawings

Frame R1 (IP21, UL Type 1)

Frame R1 (IP55, UL Type 12)

Dimension drawings 217

218 Dimension drawings

Frame R2 (IP21, UL Type 1)

Frame R2 (IP55, UL Type 12)

Dimension drawings 219

220 Dimension drawings

Frame R3 (IP21, UL Type 1)

Frame R3 (IP55, UL Type 12)

Dimension drawings 221

222 Dimension drawings

Frame R4 (IP21, UL Type 1)

7[.28]

WITHOUT GLAND BOX

490[19.291]

18[.72]

8[.32]

505[19.88]

475[18.70]

SUGGESTED MOUNTING HOLES

48[1.89]

124[4.86]

576[22.69]

Frame R4 (IP55, UL Type 12)

Dimension drawings 223

224 Dimension drawings

Frame R5 (IP21, UL Type 1)

7[.28]

WITHOUT GLAND BOX

596[23.46]

8[.32]

612[24.07]

581[22.87]

SUGGESTED MOUNTING HOLES

48[1.88]

124[4.86]

730[28.73]

Frame R5 (IP55, UL Type 12)

Dimension drawings 225

226 Dimension drawings

Frame R6 (IP21, UL Type 1)

Frame R6 (IP55, UL Type 12)

Dimension drawings 227

228 Dimension drawings

Frame R7 (IP21, UL Type 1)

Frame R7 (IP55, UL Type 12)

Dimension drawings 229

230 Dimension drawings

Frame R8 (IP21, UL Type 1)

Frame R8 (IP55, UL Type 12)

Dimension drawings 231

232 Dimension drawings

Frame R9 (IP21, UL Type 1)

Frame R9 (IP55, UL Type 12)

Dimension drawings 233

234 Dimension drawings

Safe Torque off function 235

13

Safe Torque off function

Contents of this chapter

This chapter describes the Safe torque off (STO) function of the drive and gives instructions for its use.

Description

The Safe torque off function can be used, for example, to construct safety or supervision circuits that stop the drive in case of danger (such as an emergency stop circuit). Another possible application is a prevention of unexpected start-up switch that enables short-time maintenance operations like cleaning or work on nonelectrical parts of the machinery without switching off the power supply to the drive.

When activated, the Safe torque off function disables the control voltage of the power semiconductors of the drive output stage (A, see diagram below), thus preventing the drive from generating the torque required to rotate the motor. If the motor is running when Safe torque off is activated, it coasts to a stop.

The Safe torque off function has a redundant architecture, that is, both channels must be used in the safety function implementation. The safety data given in this manual is calculated for redundant use, and does not apply if both channels are not used.

The Safe torque off function of the drive complies with these standards:

Standard Name

EN 60204-1:2006 + AC:2010 Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines –

Part 1: General requirements

236 Safe Torque off function

Standard

IEC 61326-3-1:2008

IEC 61508-1:2010

IEC 61508-2:2010

IEC 61511-1:2016

IEC 61800-5-2:2016

EN 61800-5-2:2007

IEC 62061:2015

EN 62061:2005

+AC:2010+A1:2013+A2:2015

EN ISO 13849-1:2015

EN ISO 13849-2:2012

Name

Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use – EMC requirements – Part 3-1: Immunity requirements for safety-related systems and for equipment intended to perform safety-related functions (functional safety) – General industrial applications

Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related systems – Part 1: General requirements

Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related systems – Part 2: Requirements for electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related systems

Functional safety – Safety instrumented systems for the process industry sector

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems –

Part 5-2: Safety requirements – Functional

Safety of machinery – Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems

Safety of machinery – Safety-related parts of control systems

– Part 1: General principles for design

Safety of machinery – Safety-related parts of control systems

– Part 2: Validation

The function also corresponds to Prevention of unexpected start-up as specified by

EN 1037:1995 + A1:2008 and Uncontrolled stop (stop category 0) as specified in

EN 60204-1:2006 + AC:2010.



Compliance with the European Machinery Directive

See section

Compliance with the European Machinery Directive

on page

206

.

Wiring

The following diagrams show examples of Safe torque off wiring for

• a single drive (page

237 )

• multiple drives (page

240

)

• multiple drives when an external 24 V DC power supply is used (page 241

).

For information on the specifications of the STO input, see section Control unit (ZCU-

12) connection data

on page

198

.

Safe Torque off function 237



Activation switch

In the wiring diagrams below, the activation switch has the designation (K). This represents a component such as a manually operated switch, an emergency stop push button switch, or the contacts of a safety relay or safety PLC.

• In case a manually operated activation switch is used, the switch must be of a type that can be locked out to the open position.

• The contacts of the switch or relay must open/close within 200 ms of each other.

• An FSO-xx safety functions module or an FPTC-0x thermistor protection module can also be used. For more information, see the module documentation.



Cable types and lengths

• Double-shielded twisted-pair cable is recommended.

• Maximum cable lengths:

•

•

•

300 m (984 ft) between activation switch [K] and drive control unit

60 m (200 ft) between multiple drives

60 m (200 ft) between external power supply and first drive

Note: The voltage at the INx terminals of each drive must be at least 17 V DC to be interpreted as “1”.



Grounding of protective shields

• Ground the shield in the cabling between the activation switch and the control unit at the control unit.

• Ground the shield in the cabling between two control units at one control unit only.



Single drive (internal power supply)

238 Safe Torque off function

Dual-channel connection

ACS880-01

ZCU

+24 V

Control logic

OUT1

SGND

IN1

IN2

UDC+

A

T1/U, T2/V , T3/W

UDC–

K

Safe Torque off function 239

Single-channel connection

ACS880-01

ZCU

+24 V

OUT1

SGND

IN1

IN2

K

Notes :

• Both STO inputs (IN1, IN2) must be connected to the activation switch. Otherwise, no

SIL/PL classification is given.

• Pay special attention to avoiding any potential failure modes for the wiring. For example, use shielded cable. For measures for fault exclusion of wiring, see eg. EN

ISO 13849-2:2012, table D.4.

240 Safe Torque off function



Multiple drives (internal power supply)

ACS880-01

ZCU

+24 V

OUT1

SGND

IN1

IN2

ACS880-01

ZCU

OUT1

SGND

IN1

IN2

ACS880-01

ZCU

OUT1

SGND

IN1

IN2

K



Multiple drives (external power supply)

ACS880-01

ZCU

+24 V

OUT1

SGND

Safe Torque off function 241

-

+24 V DC

+

K

IN1

IN2

ACS880-01

ZCU

OUT1

SGND

IN1

IN2

ACS880-01

ZCU

OUT1

SGND

IN1

IN2

242 Safe Torque off function

Operation principle

1. The Safe torque off activates (the activation switch is opened, or safety relay contacts open).

2. The STO inputs on the drive control unit de-energize.

3. The control unit cuts off the control voltage from the drive IGBTs.

4. The control program generates an indication as defined by parameter 31.22

(refer to the firmware manual of the drive).

5. Motor coasts to a stop (if running). The drive cannot restart while the activation switch or safety relay contacts are open. After the contacts close, a new start command is required to start the drive.

Start-up including acceptance test

To ensure the safe operation of a safety function, validation is required. The final assembler of the machine must validate the function by performing an acceptance test.

The acceptance test must be performed

• at initial start-up of the safety function

• after any changes related to the safety function (circuit boards, wiring, components, settings, etc.)

• after any maintenance work related to the safety function.



Competence

The acceptance test of the safety function must be carried out by a competent person with adequate expertise and knowledge of the safety function as well as functional safety, as required by IEC 61508-1 clause 6. The test procedures and report must be documented and signed by this person.



Acceptance test reports

Signed acceptance test reports must be stored in the logbook of the machine. The report shall include documentation of start-up activities and test results, references to failure reports and resolution of failures. Any new acceptance tests performed due to changes or maintenance shall be logged into the logbook.



Acceptance test procedure

After wiring the Safe torque off function, validate its operation as follows.

Note: If the drive is equipped with safety option +Q972 or Q973, do the procedure shown in the FSO module documentation. If an FSO-xx safety functions module or an

FPTC-0x module is installed, refer to its documentation.

Safe Torque off function 243

Action

WARNING!

Follow the safety instructions given in Safety instructions , page

13 . Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or damage to

the equipment.

Ensure that the drive can be run and stopped freely during start-up.

Stop the drive (if running), switch the input power off and isolate the drive from the power line by a disconnector.

Check the Safe torque off circuit connections against the wiring diagram.

Close the disconnector and switch the power on.

Test the operation of the STO function when the motor is stopped.

• Give a stop command for the drive (if running) and wait until the motor shaft is at a standstill.

Ensure that the drive operates as follows:

• Open the STO circuit. The drive generates an indication if one is defined for

‘stopped’ state in parameter 31.22

(see the firmware manual).

• Give a start command to verify that the STO function blocks the drive operation.

The motor should not start.

• Close the STO circuit.

• Reset any active faults. Restart the drive and check that the motor runs normally.

Test the operation of the STO function when the motor is running.

• Start the drive and ensure the motor is running.

• Open the STO circuit. The motor should stop. The drive generates an indication if one is defined for ‘running’ state in parameter 31.22

(see the firmware manual).

• Reset any active faults and try to start the drive.

• Ensure that the motor stays at standstill and the drive operates as described above in testing the operation when the motor is stopped.

• Close the STO circuit.

• Reset any active faults. Restart the drive and check that the motor runs normally.

244 Safe Torque off function

Action

Test the operation of the failure detection of the drive. The motor can be stopped or running.

• Open the 1st channel of the STO circuit (wire coming to IN1). If the motor was running, it should coast to a stop. The drive generates a FA81 Safe Torque Off 1 loss fault indication (see the firmware manual).

• Give a start command to verify that the STO function blocks the drive’s operation.

The motor should not start.

• Close the STO circuit.

• Reset any active faults. Restart the drive and check that the motor runs normally.

• Open the 2nd channel of the STO circuit (wire coming to IN2). If the motor was running, it should coast to a stop. The drive generates a FA82 Safe Torque Off 2 loss fault indication (see the firmware manual).

• Give a start command to verify that the STO function blocks the drive’s operation.

The motor should not start.

• Close the STO circuit.

• Reset any active faults. Restart the drive and check that the motor runs normally.

Document and sign the acceptance test report which verifies that the safety function is safe and accepted for operation.

Use

1. Open the activation switch, or activate the safety functionality that is wired to the

STO connection.

2. STO inputs on the drive control unit de-energize, and the drive control unit cuts off the control voltage from the inverter IGBTs.

3. The control program generates an indication as defined by parameter 31.22

(refer to the firmware manual of the drive).

4. Motor coasts to a stop (if running). The drive will not restart while the activation switch or safety relay contacts are open.

5. Deactivate the STO by closing the activation switch, or reseting the safety functionality that is wired to the STO connection.

6. Reset any faults before restarting.

WARNING!

The Safe torque off function does not disconnect the voltage of the main and auxiliary circuits from the drive. Therefore maintenance work on electrical parts of the drive or the motor can only be carried out after isolating the drive system from the main supply.

Safe Torque off function 245

The Safe torque off function is supported by any ACS880 inverter or drive firmware. It is not supported by supply or brake firmware.

WARNING!

(With permanent magnet or synchronous reluctance [SynRM] motors only) In case of a multiple IGBT power semiconductor failure, the drive system can produce an alignment torque which maximally rotates the motor shaft by

180/ p (with permanent magnet motors) or 180/2 p (with synchronous reluctance

[SynRM] motors) degrees regardless of the activation of the Safe torque off function. p denotes the number of pole pairs.

Notes:

• If a running drive is stopped by using the Safe torque off function, the drive will cut off the motor supply voltage and the motor will coast to a stop. If this causes danger or is not otherwise acceptable, stop the drive and machinery using the appropriate stop mode before activating the Safe torque off function.

• The Safe torque off function overrides all other functions of the drive.

• The Safe torque off function is ineffective against deliberate sabotage or misuse.

• The Safe torque off function has been designed to reduce the recognized hazardous conditions. In spite of this, it is not always possible to eliminate all potential hazards. The assembler of the machine must inform the final user about the residual risks.

Maintenance

After the operation of the circuit is validated at start-up, the STO function shall be maintained by periodic proof testing. In high demand mode of operation, the maximum proof test interval is 20 years. In low demand mode of operation, the maximum proof test interval is 5 or 2 years; see section

Safety data (SIL, PL) (page

246 ). It is assumed that all dangerous failures of the STO circuit are detected by the

proof test. To perform the proof test, do the Acceptance test procedure (page 242

).

Note : See also the Recommendation of Use CNB/M/11.050 (published by the

European co-ordination of Notified Bodies) concerning dual-channel safety-related systems with electromechanical outputs:

• When the safety integrity requirement for the safety function is SIL 3 or PL e (cat.

3 or 4), the proof test for the function must be performed at least every month.

• When the safety integrity requirement for the safety function is SIL 2 (HFT = 1) or

PL d (cat. 3), the proof test for the function must be performed at least every 12 months.

The STO function of the drive does not contain any electromechanical components.

In addition to proof testing, it is a good practice to check the operation of the function when other maintenance procedures are carried out on the machinery.

246 Safe Torque off function

Include the Safe torque off operation test described above in the routine maintenance program of the machinery that the inverter runs.

If any wiring or component change is needed after start up, or the parameters are restored, follow the test given in section

Acceptance test procedure on page 242

.

Use only ABB approved spare parts.

Record all maintenance and proof test activities in the machine logbook.



Competence

The maintenance and proof test activities of the safety function must be carried out by a competent person with adequate expertise and knowledge of the safety function as well as functional safety, as required by IEC 61508-1 clause 6.

Fault tracing

The indications given during the normal operation of the Safe torque off function are selected by drive parameter 31.22

.

The diagnostics of the Safe torque off function cross-compare the status of the two

STO channels. In case the channels are not in the same state, a fault reaction function is performed and the drive trips on an “STO hardware failure” fault. An attempt to use the STO in a non-redundant manner, for example activating only one channel, will trigger the same reaction.

See the drive firmware manual for the indications generated by the drive, and for details on directing fault and warning indications to an output on the control unit for external diagnostics.

Any failures of the Safe torque off function must be reported to ABB.

Safety data (SIL, PL)

The safety data for the Safe torque off function is given below.

Note : The safety data is calculated for redundant use, and does not apply if both STO channels are not used.

Frame size

SIL/

SIL

CL

SC PL

U

N

= 230 V

R1 3

R2 3

R3

R4

R5

3

3

3

3

3

3 e >99 2.84E-09 2.37E-05 5.91E-05 10489 >90 3

3 e >99 2.89E-09 2.41E-05 6.02E-05 10442 >90 3

3 e e e

SFF

(%)

>99

>99

>99

(T

1

PFH

= 20 a)

(1/h)

PFD avg

(T

1

= 2 a)

2.84E-09

2.84E-09

2.89E-09

2.37E-05

2.37E-05

2.41E-05

PFD

(T

1 avg

= 5 a)

MTTF

D

(a)

DC

(%)

5.91E-05 10530 >90

5.91E-05 10529 >90

6.02E-05 10240 >90

Cat. HFT CCF

Lifetime

(a)

3

3

3

1

1

1

1

1

80

80

80

80

80

20

20

20

20

20

Safe Torque off function 247

R6

R7

R8

R9

R3

R4

R5

Frame size

SIL/

SIL

CL

SC PL

SFF

(%)

PFH

(T

1

= 20 a)

(1/h)

PFD

(T

1 avg

= 2 a)

PFD

(T

1 avg

= 5 a)

MTTF

D

DC

(a) (%)

R6

R7

R8

3

3

3

3

3

3 e e e

>99

>99

>99

2.89E-09

2.89E-09

2.89E-09

2.41E-05

2.41E-05

2.41E-05

6.02E-05 10340 >90

6.02E-05 10340 >90

6.02E-05 10340 >90

U

N

= 400 V, U

N

= 500 V

R1 3 3 e >99 2.84E-09 2.37E-05 5.91E-05 10530 >90

R2 3 3 e >99 2.84E-09 2.37E-05 5.91E-05 10529 >90

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3 e >99 2.84E-09 2.37E-05 5.91E-05 10489 >90

3 e >99 2.89E-09 2.41E-05 6.02E-05 10442 >90

3 e >99 2.89E-09 2.41E-05 6.02E-05 10240 >90

3 e >99 2.89E-09 2.41E-05 6.02E-05 10340 >90

3 e >99 2.89E-09 2.41E-05 6.02E-05 10340 >90

3 e 99.1

3.20E-09 2.66E-05 6.65E-05 10333 >90

3 e 99.1

3.20E-09 2.66E-05 6.65E-05 10333 >90

Cat. HFT CCF

3

3

3

1

1

1

80

80

80

Lifetime

(a)

20

20

20

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

20

1 80 20

3AXD10000006217

U

N

= 690 V

R3 3

3 R5

R6...

R9

3

3

3

3 e e e

99.3

98.5

99.1

2.94E-09

3.23E-09

3.20E-09

2.42E-05

2.67E-05

2.66E-05

6.05E-05

6.68E-05

9295

5823

>90

>90

6.65E-05 10333 >90

3

3

3

1

1

1

80

80

80

20

20

20

3AXD10000083197 Rev G

• This temperature profile is used in the safety value calculations:

• 670 on/off cycles per year with T = 71.66 °C

• 1340 on/off cycles per year with T = 61.66 °C

• 30 on/off cycles per year with T = 10.0 °C

• 32 °C board temperature at 2.0% of time

• 60 °C board temperature at 1.5% of time

• 85 °C board temperature at 2.3% of time.

• The STO is a type A safety component as defined in IEC 61508-2.

• Relevant failure modes:

• The STO trips spuriously (safe failure)

• The STO does not activate when requested

A fault exclusion on the failure mode “short circuit on printed circuit board” has been made (EN 13849-2, table D.5). The analysis is based on an assumption that one failure occurs at one time. No accumulated failures have been analyzed.

• STO reaction time (shortest detectable break): 1 ms

248 Safe Torque off function

• STO response time: 2 ms (typical), 5 ms (maximum)

• Fault detection time: Channels in different states for longer than 200 ms

• Fault reaction time: Fault detection time + 10 ms

• STO fault indication (parameter 31.22

) delay: < 500 ms

• STO warning indication (parameter 31.22

) delay: < 1000 ms



Abbreviations

Abbr.

Cat.

CCF

DC

FIT

HFT

MTTF d

Reference

EN ISO 13849-1

EN ISO 13849-1

EN ISO 13849-1

IEC 61508

IEC 61508

EN ISO 13849-1

Description

Classification of the safety-related parts of a control system in respect of their resistance to faults and their subsequent behavior in the fault condition, and which is achieved by the structural arrangement of the parts, fault detection and/or by their reliability. The categories are: B, 1, 2, 3 and 4.

Common cause failure (%)

Diagnostic coverage

Failure in time: 1E-9 hours

Hardware fault tolerance

Mean time to dangerous failure: (The total number of life units)

/ (the number of dangerous, undetected failures) during a particular measurement interval under stated conditions

Average probability of dangerous failure on demand

Average frequency of dangerous failures per hour

PFD avg

PFH

IEC 61508

IEC 61508

PL

SC

SFF

SIL

EN ISO 13849-1

IEC 61508

IEC 61508

IEC 61508

Performance level. Levels a…e correspond to SIL

Systematic capability

Safe failure fraction (%)

Safety integrity level (1…3)

SILCL

SS1

IEC/EN 62061 Maximum SIL (level 1…3) that can be claimed for a safety function or subsystem

IEC/EN 61800-5-2 Safe stop 1

STO

T1

IEC/EN 61800-5-2 Safe torque off

IEC 61508-6 Proof test interval. T1 is a parameter used to define the probabilistic failure rate (PFH or PFD) for the safety function or subsystem. Performing a proof test at a maximum interval of

T1 is required to keep the SIL capability valid. The same interval must be followed to keep the PL capability (EN ISO

13849) valid. Note that any T1 values given cannot be regarded as a guarantee or warranty.

See also section Maintenance on page 245

.

Resistor braking 249

14

Resistor braking

What this chapter contains

This chapter describes how to select, protect and wire brake choppers and resistors.

The chapter also contains technical data.

Operation principle and hardware description

Frames R1 to R4 have a built-in brake chopper as standard. Frames R5 and up can be equipped with optional built-in brake chopper (+D150). Brake resistors are available as add-on kits.

The brake chopper handles the energy generated by a decelerating motor. The chopper connects the brake resistor to the intermediate DC circuit whenever the voltage in the circuit exceeds the limit defined by the control program. Energy consumption by the resistor losses lowers the voltage until the resistor can be disconnected.

Planning the braking system



Selecting the brake circuit components

1. Calculate the maximum power generated by the motor during braking ( P max

).

2. Select a suitable drive, brake chopper and brake resistor combination for the

application from the rating table on page 255

. The braking power of the chopper must be greater or equal than the maximum power generated by the motor during the braking.

3. Check the resistor selection. The energy generated by the motor during a 400second period must not exceed the resistor heat dissipation capacity E

R

.

250 Resistor braking

Note : If the E

R

value is not sufficient, it is possible to use a four-resistor assembly in which two standard resistors are connected in parallel, two in series. The E

R

value of the four-resistor assembly is four times the value specified for the standard resistor.



Selecting a custom resistor

If you use a resistor other than the default resistor, make sure that:

1. The resistance of the custom resistor is greater or equal than the resistance of the

default resistor in the rating table on page 255

:

R > R min where

R

R min

Resistance of the custom resistor.

WARNING ! Never use a brake resistor with a resistance smaller than

R min

. The drive and the chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance.

Resistance of the default resistor

2. The load capacity of the custom resistor is higher than the instantaneous maximum power consumption of the resistor when it is connected to the drive DC link voltage by the chopper:

U

DC

2

P r

<

R where

P r

U

DC

R

Load capacity of the custom resistor

Drive DC link voltage.

1.35 · 1.25 · 415 V DC (when supply voltage is 380 to 415 V AC)

1.35 · 1.25 · 500 V DC (when supply voltage is 440 to 500 V AC) or

1.35 · 1.25 · 690 V DC (when supply voltage is 525 to 690 AC)

Resistance of the custom resistor



Selecting and routing the brake resistor cables

Use the same cable type for the resistor cabling as for the drive input cabling to ensure that the input fuses also protect the resistor cable. Alternatively, a two conductor shielded cable with the same cross-sectional area can be used.

Resistor braking 251

Minimizing electromagnetic interference

Follow these rules in order to minimize electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid current changes in the resistor cables:

• Shield the braking power line completely, either by using shielded cable or a metallic enclosure. Unshielded single-core cable can only be used if it is routed inside a cabinet that efficiently suppresses the radiated emissions.

• Install the cables away from other cable routes.

• Avoid long parallel runs with other cables. The minimum parallel cabling separation distance should be 0.3 meters.

• Cross the other cables at right angles.

• Keep the cable as short as possible in order to minimize the radiated emissions and stress on chopper IGBTs. The longer the cable the higher the radiated emissions, inductive load and voltage peaks over the IGBT semiconductors of the brake chopper.

Maximum cable length

The maximum length of the resistor cable(s) is 10 m (33 ft).

EMC compliance of the complete installation

Note : ABB has not verified that the EMC requirements are fulfilled with external userdefined brake resistors and cabling. The EMC compliance of the complete installation must be considered by the customer.



Placing the brake resistors

Install the resistors outside the drive in a place where they will cool.

Arrange the cooling of the resistor in a way that:

• no danger of overheating is caused to the resistor or nearby materials

• the temperature of the room the resistor is located in does not exceed the allowed maximum.

Supply the resistor with cooling air/water according to the resistor manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING! The materials near the brake resistor must be non-flammable. The surface temperature of the resistor is high. Air flowing from the resistor is of hundreds of degrees Celsius. If the exhaust vents are connected to a ventilation system, ensure that the material withstands high temperatures. Protect the resistor against contact.

252 Resistor braking



Protecting the system against thermal overload

The brake chopper protects itself and the resistor cables against thermal overload when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. The drive control program includes a resistor and resistor cable thermal protection function which can be tuned by the user. See the firmware manual.

Frames R1 to R4

Equipping the drive with a main contactor is highly recommended for safety reasons.

Wire the contactor so that it opens in case the resistor overheats. This is essential for safety since the drive will not otherwise be able to interrupt the main supply if the chopper remains conductive in a fault situation. An example wiring diagram is shown below. ABB resistors are equipped with a thermal switch (1) inside the resistor assembly as standard. The switch indicates overtemperature and overload.

We recommend that you also wire the thermal switch to a digital input of the drive.

L1 L2 L3

OFF

1

2

1 3 5

2 4 6

ACS880

L1 L2 L3

Θ 1

13

14

ON

3

4

ACS880

+24VD x

DIx x

K1

Frames R5 to R9

A main contactor is not required for protecting against resistor overheating when the resistor is dimensioned according to the instructions and the internal brake chopper is in use. The drive will disable power flow through the input bridge if the chopper remains conductive in a fault situation but the charging resistor may fail.

Note : If an external brake chopper (outside the drive module) is used, a main contactor is always required.

Resistor braking 253

A thermal switch (standard in ABB resistors) is required for safety reasons. The thermal switch cable must be shielded and may not be longer than the resistor cable.

Wire the switch to a digital input on the drive control unit as shown in the figure below.

Θ

+24VD

DIx x x



Protecting the resistor cable against short-circuits

The input fuses will also protect the resistor cable when it is identical with the input cable.

Mechanical installation

All brake resistors must be installed outside the drive. Follow the resistor manufacturer’s instructions.

Electrical installation



Checking the insulation of the assembly

Follow the instructions given under Brake resistor assembly

on page

92 .



Connection diagram

See section

Connection diagram

on page

94

.



Connection procedure

• Connect the resistor cables to the R+ and R- terminals in the same way as the other power cables. If a shielded three-conductor cable is used, cut the third conductor, insulate it, and ground the twisted shield of the cable (protective earth conductor of the resistor assembly) at both ends.

• Connect the thermal switch of the brake resistor as described above in section

Frames R1 to R4

or

Frames R5 to R9

.

Start-up

Note: Protective oil on the brake resistors will burn off when the brake resistor is used for the first time. Make sure that the airflow is sufficient.

254 Resistor braking

Set the following parameters (ACS880 primary control program):

• Disable the overvoltage control of the drive by parameter 30.30 Overvoltage control .

• Set parameter 31.01 External event 1 source to point to the digital input where the thermal switch of the brake resistor is wired.

• Set parameter 31.02 External event 1 type to Fault .

• Enable the brake chopper by parameter 43.06 Brake chopper enable . If

Enabled with thermal model is selected, set also the brake resistor overload protection parameters 43.08 and 43.09 according to the application.

• For frames R5 to R9: Set parameter 43.07 Brake chopper runtime enable to

Other [bit] and select from parameter 10.01 DI status the digital input where the thermal switch of the brake resistor is wired.

• Check the resistance value of parameter 43.10 Brake resistance .

With these parameter settings, the drive stops by coasting on brake resistor overtemperature.

WARNING!

If the drive is equipped with a brake chopper but the chopper is not enabled by the parameter setting, the internal thermal protection of the drive against resistor overheating is not in use. In this case, the brake resistor must be disconnected.

For settings of other control programs, see the appropriate firmware manual.

Resistor braking 255

Technical data



Ratings

Drive type Internal brake chopper

P brcont kW

R min ohm

U

N

= 230 V

ACS880-01-04A6-2

ACS880-01-06A6-2

ACS880-01-07A5-2

ACS880-01-10A6-2

ACS880-01-16A8-2

ACS880-01-24A3-2

ACS880-01-031A-2

ACS880-01-046A-2

ACS880-01-061A-2

ACS880-01-075A-2

ACS880-01-087A-2

ACS880-01-115A-2

ACS880-01-145A-2

ACS880-01-170A-2

ACS880-01-206A-2

ACS880-01-274A-2

U

N

= 400 V

ACS880-01-02A4-3

ACS880-01-03A3-3

ACS880-01-04A0-3

ACS880-01-05A6-3

ACS880-01-07A2-3

ACS880-01-09A4-3

ACS880-01-12A6-3

ACS880-01-017A-3

ACS880-01-025A-3

ACS880-01-032A-3

ACS880-01-038A-3

ACS880-01-045A-3

ACS880-01-061A-3

ACS880-01-072A-3

ACS880-01-087A-3

ACS880-01-105A-3

ACS880-01-145A-3

37

45

55

75

11

18.5

22

30

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

11

3.5

2.4

2.4

1.8

12

6

6

3.5

18

18

13

12

65

65

65

65

22

37

45

55

75

11

15

18.5

22

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

3.0

4.0

5.5

7.5

13

8

8

5.4

5.4

39

19

19

13

78

78

78

39

78

78

78

78

JBR-03

JBR-03

JBR-03

JBR-03

JBR-03

JBR-03

JBR-03

SACE08RE44

SACE08RE44

SACE15RE22

SACE15RE22

SACE15RE13

SACE15RE13

SAFUR90F575

SAFUR90F575

SAFUR80F500

SAFUR80F500

Example brake resistor(s)

Type

JBR-03

JBR-03

JBR-03

JBR-03

SACE15RE22

SACE15RE22

SACE15RE13

SACE15RE13

SACE15RE13

SAFUR90F575

SAFUR90F575

SAFUR125F500

SAFUR125F500

SAFUR200F500

SAFUR200F500

SAFUR200F500

R ohm

80

80

80

80

22

22

13

13

13

8

8

4

4

2.7

2.7

2.7

E

R kJ

P

Rcont kW

9

13.5

13.5

13.5

2

4.5

4.5

9

2

2

2

2

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.14

435

1800

1800

3600

3600

5400

5400

5400

420

420

435

435

40

40

40

40

13

8

8

6

6

44

22

22

13

80

80

80

44

80

80

80

80

2

4.5

4.5

6

6

2

2

1

2

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.14

1

210

420

420

435

435

1800

1800

2400

2400

40

40

40

210

40

40

40

40

256 Resistor braking

Drive type

ACS880-01-169A-3

ACS880-01-206A-3

ACS880-01-246A-3

ACS880-01-293A-3

ACS880-01-363A-3

ACS880-01-430A-3

U

N

= 500 V

ACS880-01-02A1-5

ACS880-01-03A0-5

ACS880-01-03A4-5

ACS880-01-04A8-5

ACS880-01-05A2-5

ACS880-01-07A6-5

ACS880-01-11A0-5

ACS880-01-014A-5

ACS880-01-021A-5

ACS880-01-027A-5

ACS880-01-034A-5

ACS880-01-040A-5

ACS880-01-052A-5

ACS880-01-065A-5

ACS880-01-077A-5

ACS880-01-096A-5

ACS880-01-124A-5

ACS880-01-156A-5

ACS880-01-180A-5

ACS880-01-240A-5

ACS880-01-260A-5

ACS880-01-302A-5

ACS880-01-361A-5

ACS880-01-414A-5

U

N

= 690 V

ACS880-01-07A4-7

ACS880-01-09A9-7

5.5

7.5

ACS880-01-14A3-7 11.0

ACS880-01-019A-7 15.0

ACS880-01-023A-7 18.5

ACS880-01-027A-7 22.0

132

160

160

160

75

90

110

132

22

37

45

55

11

15

18.5

22

3.0

4.0

5.5

7.5

0.75

1.1

1.5

2.2

Internal brake chopper

P brcont kW

R min ohm

90

110

132

132

160

160

3.3

3.3

2.3

2.3

2.0

2.0

2.3

2.3

2.3

2.3

5.4

3.3

3.3

2.3

44

44

44

44

44

44

13

8

8

5.4

39

19

19

13

78

78

78

39

78

78

78

78

Example brake resistor(s)

Type

SAFUR125F500

SAFUR125F500

SAFUR200F500

SAFUR200F500

SAFUR200F500

SAFUR200F500

R ohm

4

4

2.7

2.7

2.7

2.7

E

R kJ

3600

3600

5400

5400

5400

5400

P

Rcont kW

9

9

13.5

13.5

13.5

13.5

JBR-03

JBR-03

JBR-03

JBR-03

JBR-03

JBR-03

JBR-03

SACE08RE44

SACE08RE44

SACE15RE22

SACE15RE22

SACE15RE13

SACE15RE13

SAFUR90F575

SAFUR90F575

SAFUR80F500

SAFUR80F500

SAFUR125F500

SAFUR125F500

SAFUR200F500

SAFUR200F500

SAFUR200F500

SAFUR200F500

SAFUR200F500

SACE08RE44

SACE08RE44

SACE08RE44

SACE08RE44

SACE08RE44

SACE08RE44

13

8

8

6

44

22

22

13

80

80

80

44

80

80

80

80

2.7

2.7

2.7

2.7

6

4

4

2.7

44

44

44

44

44

44

210

420

420

435

435

1800

1800

2400

40

40

40

210

40

40

40

40

2400

3600

3600

5400

5400

5400

5400

5400

210

210

210

210

210

210

2

4.5

4.5

6

2

2

1

2

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.14

1

6

9

9

13.5

13.5

13.5

13.5

13.5

1

1

1

1

1

1

Resistor braking 257

Drive type

ACS880-01-07A3-7

ACS880-01-09A8-7

ACS880-01-14A2-7

ACS880-01-018A-7

ACS880-01-022A-7

ACS880-01-026A-7

ACS880-01-035A-7

ACS880-01-042A-7

Internal brake chopper

P brcont kW

R min ohm

ACS880-01-049A-7

ACS880-01-061A-7

ACS880-01-084A-7

ACS880-01-098A-7

ACS880-01-119A-7 110

ACS880-01-142A-7 132

ACS880-01-174A-7 160

ACS880-01-210A-7 200

ACS880-01-271A-7 200

45

55

65

90

23

28

33

45

6

8

11

17

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

18

13

13

8

8

6

6

4

4

Example brake resistor(s)

Type

SACE08RE44

SACE08RE44

SACE08RE44

SACE15RE22

SACE15RE22

SACE15RE22

SACE15RE22

SACE15RE22

SACE15RE22

SACE15RE13

SACE15RE13

SAFUR90F575

SAFUR90F575

SAFUR80F500

SAFUR80F500

SAFUR125F500

SAFUR125F500

R ohm

44

44

44

22

22

22

22

22

22

13

13

8

8

6

6

4

4

420

420

420

435

435

1800

1800

2400

210

420

420

420

E

R kJ

210

210

2400

3600

3600

3AXD00000588487

2

4.5

4.5

6

2

2

2

2

P

Rcont kW

1

1

2

2

1

2

6

9

9

P brcont

Maximum continuous braking power. The braking is considered continuous if the braking time exceeds 30 seconds.

R min

R

The minimum allowed resistance value of the brake resistor

Resistance value for the listed resistor assembly

E

R

P

Rcont

Short energy pulse that the resistor assembly withstands every 400 seconds

Continuous power (heat) dissipation of the resistor when placed correctly

The rating apply at an ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F)



Degree of protection and thermal constant of the resistors

Resistor type

JBR-03

SACE

SAFUR

Degree of protection Thermal constant (s)

IP20

IP21

IP00

200

555



Terminals and cable lead-through data

See section

Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables

on page

194

.

Dimensions and weights of external resistors

258 Resistor braking



JBR-03

3AFE68711444

Resistor braking 259

JBR-03 brake resistor

Dimension A

Dimension B

Dimension C

Weight

Maximum wire size of main terminals

Tightening torque of main terminals

Wire size of thermal switch terminals

Tightening torque of thermal switch terminals



SACE08RE44

260

Ø 6

SACE_ _RE_ _

340 mm (13.39 in)

200 mm (7.87 in)

170 mm (6.69 in)

0.8 kg (1.8 lb)

10 mm

2

(AWG6)

1.5 … 1.8 N·m (13 … 16 lbf·in)

4 mm

2

(AWG12)

0.6 … 0.8 N·m (5.3 … 7.1 lbf·in)

Weight: 6 kg

(13 lb)

290

Ø 6

131

260 Resistor braking



SACE15RE13 and SACE15RE22

260

SACE15RExx

Weight: 6 kg

(13 lb)

Ø 6

290



SAFUR80F500 and SAFUR90F575

234

131

R+ R-

Ø 7

300

Brake resistor type

SAFUR80F500

SAFUR90F500

345

Weight

14 kg (31 lb)

12 kg (26 lb)

Resistor braking 261



SAFUR125F500 and SAFUR200F500

234

Brake resistor type

SAFUR125F500

SAFUR200F500

Weight

25 kg

(55 lb)

30 kg

(66 lb)

300

Ø 7

345

262 Resistor braking

Common mode, du/dt and sine filters 263

15

Common mode, du/dt and sine filters

What this chapter contains

This chapter describes how to select external filters for the drive.

Common mode filters



When is a common mode filter needed?

See section

Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive , page 60

. A common mode filter kit is available from ABB with order number is 64315811 for the drive. The kit includes three wound cores. For installation instructions of the cores, see the instruction included in the core package.

du/dt filters



When is a du/dt filter needed?

See section

Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive , page 60

.

264 Common mode, du/dt and sine filters



du/dt filter types

072A-3

087A-3

105A-3

145A-3

169A-3

206A-3

246A-3

293A-3

363A-3

430A-3

-

Drive type

ACS880-01-

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3

03A3-3

04A0-3

05A6-3

07A2-3

09A4-3

12A6-3

017A-3

025A-3

032A-3

038A-3

045A-3

061A-3 du/dt filter type Drive type

ACS880-01-

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0030-6X

NOCH0030-6X

NOCH0070-6X

NOCH0070-6X

NOCH0070-6X

NOCH0070-6X

NOCH0120-6X

NOCH0120-6X

NOCH0120-6X

FOCH0260-7X

FOCH0260-7X

FOCH0260-7X

FOCH0260-7X

FOCH0260-7X

FOCH0320-5X

FOCH0320-5X

-

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5

03A0-5

03A4-5

04A8-5

05A2-5

07A6-5

11A0-5

014A-5

021A-5

027A-5

034A-5

040A-5

052A-5

065A-5

077A-5

096A-5

124A-5

156A-5

180A-5

240A-5

260A-5

302A-5

361A-5

414A-5 du/dt filter type Drive type

ACS880-01-

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0030-6X

NOCH0030-6X

NOCH0070-6X

NOCH0070-6X

NOCH0070-6X

NOCH0070-6X

NOCH0120-6X

NOCH0120-6X

NOCH0120-6X

FOCH0260-7X

FOCH0260-7X

FOCH0260-7X

FOCH0260-7X

FOCH0260-7X

FOCH0320-5X

FOCH0320-5X

FOCH0320-5X du/dt filter type

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7 NOCH0016-6X

09A9-7

14A3-7 NOCH0016-6X

019A-7 NOCH0030-6X

023A-7 NOCH0030-6X

027A-7

07A3-7 NOCH0016-6X

09A8-7 NOCH0016-6X

14A2-7 NOCH0016-6X

018A-7

022A-7 NOCH0030-6X

026A-7 NOCH0030-6X

035A-7 NOCH0070-6X

042A-7

049A-7 NOCH0070-6X

061A-7 NOCH0120-6X

084A-7 NOCH0120-6X

098A-7

119A-7 FOCH0260-7X

142A-7 FOCH0260-7X

174A-7 FOCH0260-7X

210A-7

271A-7 FOCH0260-7X

-

NOCH0016-6X

NOCH0030-6X

NOCH0030-6X

NOCH0070-6X

NOCH0120-6X

FOCH0260-7X

-

3AXD00000588487



Description, installation and technical data of the FOCH filters

See FOCH du/dt filters hardware manual (3AFE68577519 [English]).



Description, installation and technical data of the NOCH filters

See AOCH and NOCH du/dt filters hardware manual (3AFE58933368 [English]).

Common mode, du/dt and sine filters 265

Sine filters



Selecting a sine filter for a drive

Check housing of sine filters from the manufacturer.

Drive type

ACS880-

01-...

Sine filter type

U

N

= 400 V

02A4-3 B84143V0004R229*

03A3-3 B84143V0004R229*

04A0-3 B84143V0004R229*

05A6-3 B84143V0006R229*

07A2-3 B84143V0011R229*

09A4-3 B84143V0011R229*

12A6-3 B84143V0016R229*

017A-3 B84143V0025R229*

025A-3 B84143V0025R229*

032A-3 B84143V0033R229*

038A-3 B84143V0050R229*

045A-3 B84143V0050R229*

061A-3 B84143V0066R229*

072A-3 B84143V0075R229*

087A-3 B84143V0095R229*

105A-3 B84143V0130R230**

145A-3 B84143V0162S229**

169A-3 B84143V0162S229**

206A-3 B84143V0230S229**

246A-3 B84143V0230S229**

293A-3 B84143V0390S229**

363A-3 B84143V0390S229**

430A-3 B84143V0390S229**

U

N

= 500 V

02A1-5 B84143V0004R229*

03A0-5 B84143V0004R229*

03A4-5 B84143V0004R229*

04A8-5 B84143V0006R229*

I cont.

max

A

1.9

2.8

3.1

4.4

P cont.

max kW

1.4

2.1

2.3

3.3

Heat dissipation

Drive Filter Total

W W W

337

457

562

667

907

1117

1120

1295

94

122

172

232

30

40

52

73

1440

1940

2310

3300

3900

4800

6000

58

64

77

91

24

31

37

43

7.2

9.2

12.1

16

2.3

3.1

3.8

5.3

126

153

187

209

249

297

352

30

40

52

73

250

310

400

600

140

160

220

220

90

90

80

140

60

60

60

100

550

550

900

900

1570

1570

1570

17.7

23.4

27.5

32.4

43.7

48.2

58.0

68.6

5.4

6.9

9.1

12.1

1.7

2.3

2.9

4.0

94.6

115.0

140.6

157.6

187.8

223.6

265.2

60

60

60

100

477

617

782

887

1157

1427

1520

1895

184

212

252

372

90

100

112

173

1990

2490

3210

4200

5470

6370

7570

90

100

112

173

Noise dB(A)

72

72

72

72

78

79

79

80

75

75

78

78

72

72

72

75

72

72

72

72

80

80

80

80

80

80

80

266 Common mode, du/dt and sine filters

Drive type

ACS880-

01-...

Sine filter type

05A2-5 B84143V0006R229*

07A6-5 B84143V0011R229*

11A0-5 B84143V0011R229*

014A-5 B84143V0016R229*

021A-5 B84143V0025R229*

027A-5 B84143V0033R229*

034A-5 B84143V0050R229*

040A-5 B84143V0050R229*

052A-5 B84143V0066R229*

065A-5 B84143V0066R229*

077A-5 B84143V0075R229*

096A-5 B84143V0130S230**

124A-5 B84143V0130S230**

156A-5 B84143V0162S229**

180A-5 B84143V0162S229**

240A-5 B84143V0230S229**

260A-5 B84143V0230S229**

361A-5 B84143V0390S229**

414A-5 B84143V0390S229**

U

N

= 690 V

07A4-7 B84143V0010R230*

09A9-7 B84143V0010R230*

14A3-7 B84143V0018R230*

019A-7 B84143V0018R230*

023A-7 B84143V0026R230*

027A-7 B84143V0026R230*

07A3-7 B84143V0010R230*

09A8-7 B84143V0010R230*

14A2-7 B84143V0018R230*

018A-7 B84143V0018R230*

022A-7 B84143V0026R230*

026A-7 B84143V0026R230*

035A-7 B84143V0040R230*

I cont.

max

A

104

140

161

205

44

52

61

80

20

25

32

35

4.8

7.0

10.2

13

221

289

332

21

25

7.3

9.3

7.3

9.3

13.5

17.1

13.5

17.1

21

25

33

P cont.

max kW

33.2

39.2

46.0

60.6

78.7

105.8

121.3

154.3

14.7

18.8

23.7

26.0

3.6

5.3

7.7

9.8

166.7

217.9

250.1

Heat dissipation

Drive Filter Total

W W W

907

1117

1120

1295

1440

1940

2310

3300

337

457

562

667

94

122

172

232

3900

4800

6000

630

550

550

900

250

250

310

*630

140

160

220

220

100

90

90

80

900

1570

1570

1157

1367

1430

1925

2070

2490

2860

4200

477

617

782

887

194

212

262

312

4800

6370

7570

Noise dB(A)

80

80

80

80

78

78

78

80

80

80

80

75

75

78

78

72

72

72

70

5.5

7.0

10.2

12.9

15.7

18.6

5.5

7.0

10.2

12.9

15.7

18.6

25.1

114

143

207

274

329

405

217

284

399

490

578

660

864

90

90

130

130

160

160

90

90

130

130

160

160

250

204

233

337

404

489

565

307

374

529

620

738

820

1114

72

72

72

72

72

72

72

72

72

72

72

72

75

Common mode, du/dt and sine filters 267

Drive type

ACS880-

01-...

042A-7

049A-7

Sine filter type

B84143V0040R230*

B84143V0056R230**

I cont.

max

A

061A-7 B84143V0056R230**

084A-7 B84143V0092R230**

098A-7

119A-7

B84143V0092R230**

B84143V0130S230**

142A-7 B84143V0130S230**

174A-7 B84143V0207S230**

210A-7

271A-7

B84143V0207S230**

B84143V0207S230**

161

208

* minimum switching frequency 3.0 kHz

** minimum switching frequency 2.4 kHz

92

112

112

138

40

48

56

78

P cont.

max kW

30.1

36.2

42.5

58.6

69.3

84.2

84.7

103.7

121.3

156.4

Heat dissipation

Drive Filter Total

W W W

998

1120

1295

1440

1940

2310

3300

3900

4200

4800

250

290

290

610

610

630

630

930

930

930

1248

1410

1585

2050

2550

2940

3930

4830

5130

5730

Noise dB(A)

79

80

80

80

75

78

78

79

80

80

3AXD00000588487



Definitions

P cont. max

I cont. max

Noise

Maximum continuous output power of the drive

Maximum continuous output current of the drive

Noise level of the sine filters



Derating

See section

Deratings for special settings in the drive control program on page 162

.



Description, installation and technical data

See Sine filters hardware manual (3AXD50000016814 [English])

268 Common mode, du/dt and sine filters

Further information

Product and service inquiries

Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/searchchannels .

Product training

For information on ABB product training, navigate to new.abb.com/service/training .

Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Navigate to new.abb.com/drives/manuals-feedback-form .

Document library on the Internet

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet at www.abb.com/drives/documents .

Contact us

www.abb.com/drives www.abb.com/drivespartners

3AUA0000078093 Rev M (EN) EFFECTIVE: 2017-08-08